Gateway Operation

The Gateway command in AEA data controllers now supports a "node" function as well as the cross-port digipeater function previously supported. The dual connection function, called a "node" by other manufacturers, is still called a "gateway" by us.

The old gateway  functioned as a digipeater between Ports 1 and 2. MYGATE works the same as MYALIAS, except that incoming packets from one port are digipeated out the other port.This cross-port digipeater function uses end-to-end acknowledgments. This means that an I-frame sent by the local station must be received correctly by both the digipeater and the remote station. The acknowledgment of the I-frame must similarly pass from the remote  station through the digipeater and arrive at the local station intact. If there are any errors in either hop, the whole I-frame/acknowledgment cycle must start over.

Fortunately, this is now a thing of the past. The new Gateway is a node.

The Gateway now supports local acknowledgments.  This function is available in all AEA packet radio TNCs.  Instead of digipeating through the MYGATE callsign, a station may now connect to the MYGATE callsign, then instruct the gateway to set up another connection, either on the same radio port or the opposite port.  The station's I-frames are acknowledged by the Gateway locally, rather than by the remote station through a digipeater. The Gateway itself now has the responsibility of seeing that the I-frame gets to the remote station.

There are two new commands supporting the new Gateway functions:

GUSERS sets the maximum number of stations allowed to establish connections with the callsign MYGATE.

XGATEWAY turns ON and OFF the ability to allow cross-port connections in the PK-900 of DSP-2232 dual port products.

The requirements for Gateway connection are:

- If Port 1 is to be used, OPMODE must be PACKET, AMTOR or PACTOR.

 Port 2 is of course always PACKET.

- RADIO must be set to enable the appropriate port(s).

- A modem supporting the appropriate port(s) and operating mode(s) must be selected.

- MYCALL must be set for each radio port to be used.

- MYGATE must be set to some callsign, but not the same as MYCALL, MYALIAS or MYMAIL.

- GUSERS must be set to 1, 2 or 3.

Once connected to the Gateway, the user is dealing with a command processor similar to that in a BBS.  Command responses start with "+++" to show that they came from the Gateway command processor, rather than the "***" from a TNC (or "###" from a competitor's product).  "+++" was chosen because the "+" is present in the AMTOR character set while the other examples are not.

Here is what a user sees when using the Gateway as a packet node. In this example, MYGATE is set to N7ML-7, and the user connects to N7ML-7:

cmd:c n7ml-7

*** CONNECTED to N7ML-7

+++ N7ML Gateway. Type ? for help.

de N7ML-7 (B,C,D,J,L,N,S,?) >

The first line is the user's command to his own TNC.  The second line is the connect message from the user's TNC.  At this point the user is connected to the Gateway in a "Command" mode.  The third line is the greeting and the fourth is the command prompt from the Gateway.  The user types "? <Return>" to get help:

B(ye)         Log off gateway

C(onnect) n   Connect to station 'n'

C n STAY      Stay connected to gateway when 'n' disconnects

D(isconnect)  Cancel a connect attempt

J(heard)      Display stations heard

L(isten)      Toggle monitoring

N(odes)       Display nodes heard

S(end)        Broadcast unproto

de N7ML-7 (B,C,D,J,L,N,S,?) >

BYE - This is similar to the Bye command found in the AEA Maildrop and BBS stations.  The Gateway initiates a Disconnect.  Alternatively, the user may initiate the Disconnect.

CONNECT - Similar to the TNC's Connect command for Packet mode.  Also used to connect in AMTOR and PACTOR, instead of using the ARQ and PTCONN commands respectively.  For a packet connection, the user may specify a string of digipeaters:

c w1aw via w2xy, w1xxz

The Gateway now tries to establish a connection with W1AW as the destination, and the user's callsign as the source, with a difference: the user's SSID is decremented by one, to avoid protocol conflicts on the same frequency.

Here is an example of the frames sent in establishing a typical connection:

USER>GATE [C]

GATE>USER (UA)

GATE>USER [I]:

   +++ N7ML Gateway.  Type ? for help.

   de GATE (B,C,D,J,L,N,S,?) >

USER>GATE (RR)

USER>GATE [I]:

   c remote

GATE>USER (RR)      USER-15>REMOTE [C]

                    REMOTE>USER-15 (UA)

GATE>USER [I]:

   +++ CONNECTED to REMOTE at GATE

USER>GATE (RR)

USER>GATE [I]:

   hello.

GATE>USER (RR)      USER-15>REMOTE [I]:

                      hello.

                    REMOTE>USER-15 (RR)

                    REMOTE>USER-15 [I]:

                       Yes?

GATE>USER [I]:      USER-15>REMOTE (RR)

                       Yes?

USER>GATE (RR)

Once the remote connection is established, the Gateway notifies the user of the connection and then goes from "Command" mode into a "Converse" mode. Now anything the user sends goes to the remote station as data, instead of to the Gateway as commands.

When the remote station disconnects, normally the user will also be disconnected from the Gateway.  Typing out the word STAY as the last argument in the Connect command ("c remote stay") makes sure that if the remote station disconnects, the user will remain connected to the Gateway. If the connect attempt to a remote station retries out, or the remote  station is busy, the Gateway sends the user a "Retry count exceeded" or "(Remote) busy" message but stays connected to the user even if the word STAY was not specified.

DISCONNECT (Cancel a connect attempt) -- Since the user remains in command mode until the connection is established, there is no need to wait the full number of retries to attempt a different connection.  The user may send the Gateway a Disconnect command, which cancels the Connect command the same way as in the local TNC's command mode.  The user stays connected to the Gateway even if the word STAY was not used in the original Connect command.  The Disconnect command may be used at any time before the connection is established, regardless of any preceding commands.

Once a connection is established and the Gateway is in QSO mode, the user can end the connection either by sending a Bye command to the remote station if the remote supports it, or by issuing a disconnect frame using the local TNC's Disconnect command.  The user's disconnecting from the Gateway causes the Gateway to disconnect the other side of the link.

JHEARD - The Gateway TNC sends its MHEARD list to the user.  The Gateway TNC's DAYTIME and DAYSTAMP commands affect the display.  In the DSP-2232 and PK-900, the designators "p1" and "p2" show the port on which each station was heard.  A maximum of 18 stations is kept in the JHEARD list.

LISTEN - The Gateway toggles monitoring on or off.  The Gateway monitors only on the radio port selected by the user (see "Port" below), using the appropriate operating mode.

NODES - The Gateway sends the user a list of nodes heard.  The format is the same as that of the JHEARD command.  The difference is that a callsign is put in the Nodes list only if the monitored packet was a UI frame with a PID of CF (NET/ROM) or CD (IP).  A maximum of 10 stations is kept in the Nodes list.  The Gateway owner clears the nodes list and the MHEARD list simultaneously with the same command.

SEND -- The Gateway TNC responds with

+++ Sending.  To end, type '='.

and sends all subsequent data in the broadcast format appropriate to the selected port's operating mode.  The data characters are held until the user sends a carriage return, whereupon the held data is broadcast.

In all operating modes, the user can stop sending unproto by sending the "=" character.  The Gateway then issues a command prompt.  The "=" character should not be used within the user's broadcast text.

Cross port gateway:

The requirements for cross-port Gateway connection are, in addition to the above:

- OPMODE must be PACKET, AMTOR or PACTOR.

- If AMTOR is to be used, MYSELCAL must be set.

- If PACTOR is to be used, MYPTCALL must be set.

- If AMTOR or PACTOR are to be used, the DCD threshold must be set so that the DCD display is lit if and only if signals are present.

- RADIO must be set to RADIO 1/2 (both ports enabled).

- Modems supporting the appropriate OPMODE on Port 1 and Packet on  Port 2 must be selected.

- XGATEWAY must be ON.

Packet to Packet:

Here is what a user sees when using a cross-port Gateway as a packet node:

cmd:c n7ml-7

*** CONNECTED to N7ML-7

+++ N7ML Gateway.  Other port (2) is 1200 bps Packet.  Type ? for help.

+++ Access:  Port 1, 1200 bps Packet.  Your ID is KB7B-15.

de N7ML-7 (B,C,D,J,L,N,P,S,?) >

There is extra information showing which radio port the user is on and the configuration of the other radio port.  The Help ("?") display shows an additional command:

P(ort) 1/2    Access Port 1 or 2

PORT - Changes the port on which the user wishes to connect, listen and broadcast.  At the time the Packet user connects to the gateway, access is always on the same radio port, so a Port 2 Packet user must always set PORT 1 in order to establish cross-port connections.  Typing "Port" by itself shows the current value of PORT, the operating mode on that port, and the user's ID to be used on that port.  Port 1 AMTOR and PACTOR users always access only Port 2 (Packet), so the Port command is not implemented for them.

LISTEN - None of the Gateway TNC's local commands affect monitoring; packet frames are shown to the user as if MONITOR and MCON were set to a value of 4 (UI, I, C, D, UA and DM frames).

Other than that, monitoring behaves as if all other commands were set to their default values (no MPROTO, etc.)

SEND - The Gateway sends UI frames with a destination of "CQ". The source field is the user's callsign with the SSID decremented by one.

Packet to AMTOR:

Here is what a Port 2 Packet user sees when crossing over to AMTOR:

cmd:c n7ml-7

*** CONNECTED to N7ML-7

+++ N7ML Gateway.  Other port (1) is AMTOR.  Type ? for help.

+++ Access:  Port 2, 1200 bps Packet.  Your ID is KB7B-15.

de N7ML-7 (B,C,D,J,L,N,P,S,?) >

p 1

+++ Access:  Port 1, AMTOR.  Your ID is KKBB.

de N7ML-7 (B,C,D,J,L,N,P,S,?) >

At this point there are two ways to establish an AMTOR link.  One is to call a known station directly:

c nbcd

+++ CONNECTED to NBCD at N7ML-7

+++ Note:  Over = "+?", End = <CTRL-D>.  You're sending.

n7bcd de kb7b - hello +?

HI THERE.  ...

Keeping in mind that only one station can transmit at a time. The packet user must end each transmission with "+? <Return>" to let the remote station respond.  Either station may end the communication; if it is to be the user, a <CTRL-D> within the user's packet frame tells the Gateway to shut down the AMTOR link.

The other way to set up a link is to call CQ in AMTOR FEC and wait for an ARQ response:

s

+++ Sending.  To end, type '='.

cq cq cq de kb7b selcal kkbb

cq cq cq de kb7b selcal kkbb

pse k=

de N7ML-7 (B,C,D,J,L,N,P,S,?) >

+++ CONNECTED to ? at N7ML-7

+++ Note:  Over = "+?", End = <CTRL-D>.  You're receiving.

KB7B DE VE7ZZY HI NAME IS RALPH +?

hello ...

Note that the Gateway reports "CONNECTED to ?".  When using four-character identification, AMTOR has no provision for identifying the calling station. The caller generally identifies within the transmission text.

LISTEN - The Gateway TNC is placed in ARQ Listen mode (Mode L). If the Gateway TNC's ARXTOR command is ON, it will also copy AMTOR FEC (Mode B).

SEND - The Gateway is placed in AMTOR FEC (Mode B) transmit mode. Transmission ends when the user sends "=".

Packet to PACTOR:

Here is what a Port 2 Packet user sees when crossing over to PACTOR:

cmd:c n7ml-7

*** CONNECTED to N7ML-7

+++ N7ML Gateway.  Other port (1) is PACTOR.  Type ? for help.

+++ Access:  Port 2, 1200 bps Packet.  Your ID is KB7B-15.

de N7ML-7 (B,C,D,J,L,N,P,S,?) >

p 1

+++ Access:  Port 1, PACTOR.  Your ID is KB7B.

de N7ML-7 (B,C,D,J,L,N,P,S,?) >

One way to establish a PACTOR link is to call a known station directly:

c n7bcd stay

+++ CONNECTED to N7BCD at N7ML-7

+++ Note:  Over = <CTRL-Z>, End = <CTRL-D>.  You're sending.hello.  ...

The other way is to call CQ in PACTOR Broadcast mode and wait for a response:

s

+++ Sending.  To end, type '='.

cq cq cq de kb7b

cq cq cq de kb7b

pse k=

de N7ML-7 (B,C,D,J,L,N,P,S,?) >

+++ CONNECTED to VE7ZZY at N7ML-7

+++ Note:  Over = <CTRL-Z>, End = <CTRL-D>.  You're receiving.

KB7B DE VE7ZZY - Hello  ...

Keeping in mind that only one station can transmit at a time, the packet user must end each transmission with "<CTRL-Z> <Return>" to let the remote station respond.  Either station may end the communication; if it is to be the user, a <CTRL-D> within the user's packet frame tells the Gateway to shut down the PACTOR link.

LISTEN - The Gateway TNC is placed in PACTOR Listen mode.  If the Gateway TNC's ARXTOR command is ON, it will also monitor AMTOR FEC and ARQ. Use the "Port" command to see which mode is being copied, if in doubt.

SEND - The Gateway is placed in PTSEND mode.  The transmission ends when the user sends "=".

AMTOR to Packet:

If XGATEWAY is OFF, the TNC accepts AMTOR calls to MYSELCAL as normal AMTOR link-ups.  If XGATEWAY is ON, an AMTOR call to MYSELCAL results in access to the Gateway and therefore Packet mode on Port 2.  The callsign in MYGATE plays no part in Gateway access from AMTOR.

The AMTOR MailDrop has priority over the AMTOR Gateway.  This means that if TMAIL is ON, linking to MYSELCAL accesses the MailDrop.  The user may type the new MailDrop command "G" to access the Gateway; this surrenders the MailDrop to possible access by other users.  There is no command in the Gateway to return to the MailDrop.

If a Packet user is already connected to the Gateway on Port 2 and has issued the "PORT 1" command to access AMTOR, the Gateway detects AMTOR calls only to the packet user's selcall, not MYSELCAL.

There is no PORT command for AMTOR access.  The AMTOR user is given access to Packet on Port 2 automatically.

An AMTOR station linked to the Gateway command processor does not need to send "+?" to let the Gateway transmit.  The Gateway detects the carriage return at the end of the line and seizes the link to give the command response, then gives transmission back to the user by ending the transmission with "+?".

Once a packet connection has been established on Port 2, the Gateway seizes the AMTOR link on Port 1 only when it has data to send to the user, then gives the link back by ending the transmission with "+?".

Here is what an AMTOR user sees when connecting to the Gateway:

cmd:arq nnml

+++ N7ML GATEWAY.  TYPE ? FOR HELP.

+++ ENTER YOUR CALLSIGN: +?

kb7b

+++ ACCESS:  PORT 2, 1200 BPS PACKET.  YOUR ID IS KB7B-15.

KB7B DE N7ML-7 GA+?

One way to establish a Packet connection is to call a known station directly:

j

18:30:56  P2 N7BCD

KB7B DE N7ML-7 GA+?

c n7bcd stay

+++ CONNECTED TO N7BCD AT N7ML-7

+?

hello

HI, NAME IS WALT ...

The other way is to call CQ in Unproto mode and wait for a response:

+++ SENDING.  TO END, TYPE '='.

+?

cq de kb7b-15 from amtor=

KB7B DE N7ML-7 GA+?

+++ CONNECTED TO N7BCD AT N7ML-7

+?

HI, NAME IS WALT.  WHAT DO YOU MEAN BY 'FROM AMTOR'?

hello ...

One thing to keep in mind when accessing VHF Packet from AMTOR is that the data rates on the two radio ports are widely different.  In reading a long message from a packet BBS, the BBS sends the entire message to the Gateway Packet port, then may time out and disconnect before the message has completed transmission on the AMTOR port.  The Gateway buffers the data, so none of the message is lost.  But on the Packet side, the BBS has wasted time waiting for the next command, preventing other stations from using the BBS.

LISTEN - Port 2 Packet frames are shown to the user as if MONITOR and MCON were set to a value of 4 (UI, I, C, D, UA and DM frames).  Some TNC monitoring characters are translated for AMTOR:

L

+++ LISTENING ON

KB7B DE N7ML-7 GA+?

P2 N7BCD)W1AW (C)

P2 N7BCD)W1AW (D)

+?

L

+++ LISTENING OFF

KB7B DE N7ML-7 GA+?

SEND - The Gateway sends UI frames with a destination of "CQ".

The source field is the user's callsign with the SSID decremented by one.  The Gateway holds the data characters until the user sends a carriage return, whereupon the held data is broadcast.

PACTOR TO Packet:

If XGATEWAY is OFF, the TNC accepts PACTOR calls to MYPTCALL as normal PACTOR link-ups.  If XGATEWAY is ON, a PACTOR call to MYPTCALL results in access to the Gateway and therefore Packet mode on Port 2.  The callsign in MYGATE plays no part in Gateway access from PACTOR.

The PACTOR maildrop (TMAIL ON) has priority over the PACTOR Gateway. The maildrop command "G" gives access to the Gateway, as in AMTOR (see above).

If a Packet user is already connected to the Gateway on Port 2 and has issued the "PORT 1" command to access PACTOR, the Gateway detects PACTOR calls only to the packet user's callsign, not MYPTCALL.

There is no PORT command for PACTOR access.  The PACTOR user is given access to Packet on Port 2 automatically.

A PACTOR station linked to the Gateway command processor does not need to send the PTOVER character to let the Gateway transmit.  In "command" mode, the Gateway detects the carriage return at the end of the line and seizes the link to give the response, then gives transmission back to the user. Once a packet connection has been established on Port 2, the Gateway seizes the PACTOR link on Port 1 only when it has data to send to the user, then gives the link back.

Here is what a PACTOR user sees when connecting to the Gateway:

cmd:ptconn n7ml

+++ N7ML Gateway.  Type ? for help.

+++ Access:  Port 2, 1200 bps packet.  Your ID is KB7B-15.

KB7B de N7ML (B,C,D,J,L,N,S,?) >

One way to establish a Packet connection is to call a known station directly:

18:30:56  p2 N7BCD

KB7B de N7ML (B,C,D,J,L,N,S,?) >

c n7bcd stay

+++ CONNECTED to N7BCD at N7ML-7

hello

hi, name is walt ...

The other way is to call CQ in Unproto mode and wait for a response:

s

+++ Sending.  To end, type '='.

cq de kb7b-15 from pactor=

KB7B de N7ML (B,C,D,J,L,N,S,?) >

+++ CONNECTED to N7BCD at N7ML-7

Hi, name is Walt.  What do you mean by "from pactor"?

hello ...

LISTEN - Port 2 Packet frames are shown to the user as if MONITOR and MCON were set to a value of 4 (UI, I, C, D, UA and DM frames).

L

+++ Listening ON

KB7B de N7ML (B,C,D,J,L,N,S,?) >

p2 N7BCD>W1AW [C]

p2 N7BCD>W1AW [D]

L

+++ Listening OFF

KB7B de N7ML (B,C,D,J,L,N,S,?) >

SEND - The Gateway sends UI frames with a destination of "CQ".

The source field is the user's callsign with the SSID decremented by one. The Gateway holds the data characters until the user sends a carriage return, whereupon the held data is broadcast.

Error Messages to The Remote User:

"Bad"

An invalid callsign in response to the AMTOR prompt "Enter your callsign."An invalid callsign as one of the arguments in the Connect command.An invalid argument to the Port command.

"Too many"

Too many callsigns in the Connect command.

Arguments in the Bye, Disconnect, Jheard, Listen, Nodes or Send commands.

"Too long"

Command longer than 85 characters.PACTOR callsign in Connect command was longer than 8 characters.

"Range"

Port command argument not "1" or "2."

"Callsign"

No argument in the Connect command.

"What?"

Unrecognized command.

"?VIA"

Connect command: second argument was not "STAY" or "VIA."

"Not during connect"

While a connect attempt was in progress, the user issued a Listen, a Send or another Connect command, or tried to change Ports.  User must first type the "Disconnect" command.

"Already disconnected"

User issued the Disconnect (abort) command when no connect was in progress.

"Need MYSelcal"

Packet user tried to make an AMTOR connect, but the Gateway TNC's MYSELCAL was not set.

"None heard"

The Jheard or Nodes list is empty.

"Channel busy"

Connect or Send command while there is AMTOR or PACTOR activity on the channel.  Gateway uses synced radio DCD to determine activity.

"Port busy"

Connect, Listen or Send command on a packet port where all multi-connect channels are being used.  Attempt to use the Port command to access a port whose operating mode is not Packet, AMTOR Standby or PACTOR Standby. Port 2 user attempt to access AMTOR or PACTOR Port 1 if it was already in use by another Port 2 Packet user of the Gateway.

"Not while listening"

While listening, the user issued a Send or Connect command, or tried to change Ports.  User must first type "Listen" again to toggle listening off.

Miscellaneous:

Every 9.5 minutes, the Gateway sends a Packet ID frame containing the Gateway callsign.  The ID frame is sent even if the HID command is OFF.

In translating AMTOR or PACTOR input to Packet output, the Gateway bundles the characters and sends them in packets every 10 seconds.  The AMTOR/PACTOR user should be aware that the Packet station may receive the data characters anywhere from 0 to 10 seconds later.

No-activity timers: When the TNC's CHECK timer runs out on a packet channel involving the Gateway, the Gateway stations are disconnected. CHECK defaults to 5 minutes.  For AMTOR and PACTOR Gateway access, if "Traffic" status has not been achieved for 5 minutes, the Gateway terminates the link gracefully, and disconnects any related packet connection on Port 2.

The MDMON command controls the monitoring of Gateway activity in addition to monitoring Maildrop activity.

To operate AMTOR or PACTOR modes normally (no gateway), disable the cross-mode gateway by setting XGATEWAY OFF.  Subsequent remote calls to MYSELCAL or MYPTCALL will go to the operator, not the gateway.

The gateway owner should take care that changes in the OPMODE, RADIO or MODEM  command settings will not ruin a remote user's gateway session. Check the CSTATUS before changing the TNC's configuration.

It is important to set the DCD threshold on the AMTOR/PACTOR radio port so the DCD display follows the presence or absence of signals.

This prevents the Gateway Send and Connect commands from interfering with other stations.  If DCD is active at the time of a command that transmits, the Gateway sends the remote user a "Channel busy" message.

The Gateway owner may set ARXTOR ON and leave OPMODE set to PACTOR. This gives both AMTOR and PACTOR users access to the Gateway (and/or the maildrop).

The Gateway owner may set up upper/lower case AMTOR operation for better Packet interfacing by setting CODE 2 (Cyrillic method) or CODE 7 (APLINK/Martinez method, to be added shortly).  The remote AMTOR user must of course set comparable commands in his own TNC.

The local TNC commands CTEXT, CMSG, MTEXT and MMSG have no effect on Gateway operation.


Mail Drop Operation

The MailDrop in your AEA TNC or data controller operates in Packet, AMTOR and PACTOR modes.  To access the MailDrop from any of these modes press the [image]  button on the Tool Bar.

Before other stations can access your MailDrop, you must enter your MYMAIL callsign and enable the MailDrop by pressing the [image] button.  Also, be sure and  review the MailDrop Parameters  in the Parameter menu if you are unfamiliar with A.E.A. MailDrop operation.

PC-Pakratt for Windows gives you full control over your TNC's Mail Drop. When the Mail Drop Dialog opens, the messages in the TNC are listed and displayed near the top of the window in an area called the message List Box as shown below.

To Read a message, double-click on the message in the List Box. The message text will then be displayed in the Read box immediately below.  To save the message that is presently being displayed in the Read box, click on the File button. The file dialog will appear prompting you for a file name to save the message to.

To Print a message, the message must first be read. The font selected as the default printer font will be used. The printer font is selected from the Configure Menu.

To delete a message, the message must first be selected from the List Box. Once a message is selected, click on KILL.

To edit a message header, first select the message then click on Edit.  The Edit Message Dialog will allow you to change the status of the message and change the source/destination/BBS callings.

To Load Mail Drop messages from disk, click on the Load Button.  Do not worry, the TNC will not be RESET.

To Save Mail Drop messages to disk, click on the Save Button.

The Font button allows you to change the font used in the MailDrop dialog. The default is a Terminal font. The Terminal font supports all 256 possible characters from the IBM PC characters. Other fonts, such as Arial, only support a limit set of characters.

To enter a message in to the MailDrop, click on the Send button. The MailDrop Send Dialog will allow you to send messages to your MailDrop.

The MailDrop dialog can also be sized (in the horizontal dimension only) to take maximum advantage of your screen resolution.

To close the MailDrop dialog, click on the Quit button.


NAVTEX/TDM Operation

Key Definitions:

ALT-L:  Sends the LOCK (Ltrs) command to the TNC.

ALT-N:  Sends the NUMS command to the TNC.

ALT-Q: Refreshes the windows.

ALT-R: Clears Receive window and Scroll Back Buffer.

ALT-U: Initiates a File Capture.

ALT-V: Toggles Radio ports on the DSP-1232 Only.

ALT-Z: Changes Operating Mode.

PgUP: Calls the Scroll Back Buffer

HOME: Calls the QSO Log Dialog.

PRINT Screen: Saves incoming data to the printer.

F6: Toggles RXREV on/off.

^F6 : Issues a FREE command check to the TNC.

 Button Descriptions:

  ARQE. Press this button to enter the ARQE receive mode.

The Button will stay depressed when in ARQE mode.

 TDM. Press this button to enter the TDM receive mode.

The Button will stay depressed when in TDM mode.

 NAVTEX. Press this button to enter the NAVTEX receive

mode.  The Button will stay depressed when in NAVTEX.

 Clears the receive window and the Scroll Back Buffer.

 Saves incoming data so it can to be printed. When data is being saved, the button will change to [image]. Click on the button again to stop saving data and spool the data to the printer. Be sure you have selected the printer font and point size before printing.

 Turns on the File Capture. When a File capture is in progress the button is stays depressed. Click on the depressed button to stop the File Capture.

 File Capture hold/release button. When a File Capture is taking place, the button changes to [image]. Clicking on the button while it is green will pause the File Capture. The button then will change to [image]. Clicking on the button will change it back to green and the File Capture will continue. When the File Capture is terminated, the button returns back to gray.

 LOCK (Ltrs) Forces Letters should the printing suddenly shift to Figs due to a received error.

 NUMS Forces Numbers should the printing suddenly shift to Letters due to a received error.

  Toggles the RXREV command on/off.

 Opens and displays the QSO Log Dialog.

  Toggles the WIDESHFT command on/off.


Editing Mail Drop Messages

To edit a message header, first select the message then click on Edit. The Edit Message Dialog will allow you to change the status of the message and change the source/destination/BBS callsigns.

Message Status

Private

Message can only be read by the SYSOP (you) or the destination station.

Traffic

Message is designated as traffic.

Bulletin

Message is designated as a bulletin message which can be read by anyone.

Reverse Forward

Message will be forwarded to the BBS designated by HOMEBBS.

Read

Message will be tagged as having been read.

Not Read

Message will be tagged as not being read.

Click on the OK button to have the changes take effect.

See also Mail Drop Operation.


QSO LOG

PC-Pakratt for Windows' QSO log allows you to maintain a database of your contacts. Each TNC has it's own QSO Log Dialog and database file. The DSP-2232 and PK-900 Port 1 and Port 2 windows share the same QSO facilities.

The QSO Log is opened by clicking on the [image] button which is displayed in the Status Dialog of each operation window. The QSO Log Dialog is an independent window which can be any where on the Desktop.  Also that the upper right hand corner of the QSO Log window contains a Minimize button so the Log can be out of sight and still active (Minimized).  This is handy since it allows the 'Auto QSO Check' feature to be work even when the QSO Log is out of sight.

The QSO Log contains fields for:

† Callsign	† Name

† Freq.	† QTH

   Time	Antenna

† Date	Rig

10-10 #	Operator

Power	RST	Your RST

† Mode	QSL Sent	QSL Received

Comments

Fields which have an † are also search fields. To search for an entry in your log, check one of these boxes and press the FORWARD or BACKWARD buttons. PPWIN will attempt to find the next entry which matches. One of the fields must be checked for a search to be conducted.

PPWIN uses the checked fields to match all or part of the same field in the log. For example, if you enter J4PZ as the callsign, PPWIN will find a match if your log contains NJ4PZ, J4PZA or KJ4PZQ. Also long as the entry in the log contains the same sequence of letters, a match will be found.

o Delete

Deletes the Log Entry currently displayed.

o Clr Entry

Clears all the fields in the Dialog, but does not delete the displayed entry.

o Overwrite

Overwrites the current entry.

o Save

Saves the data to the end of the Log file.

o Print

Allows you to print the current entry or all of the entries. You also have the choice of printing the entries as a QSL label or as they are shown in the Dialog. You also have the option to print all or some of the comments for each QSO  entry printed. See also QSO Log Print Menu.

o 1st Entry

Displays the 1st entry in the Log.

o Last Entry

Displays the last entry in the Log.

o Prev

Displays the previous entry in the Log,

o Next

Displays the next entry in the Log.

o Time/Date

Places the current time and date into the Log.

o Defaults

Places the QSO Log Defaults and the current time/date into the log. The Defaults file contains the Operator, rig, antenna and power. These values can be specified in the TNC Configuration Menu (under TNC and QSO Log Defaults). The QSO Log database file can be specified under the TNC Configuration Menu, under TNC Program Files.


QSO Log Printing
QSO Log Print Menu

PC-Pakratt for Windows allows you to print the entries in your QSO Log. When the PRINT button is selected from the QSO Log Dialog, the QSO Log Print Menu is displayed.

When the OK Button is clicked, the selected entries are sent to the printer or to a file if the 'Print To File' option is selected.  Be sure you have set up your printer for Windows by selecting the Printer Setup option from the Files Menu.  Also be sure to select a printer font and print size from the Select Font option in the Configure Menu.

Printing QSO Entries

o Print QSO

Prints the currently displayed entry

o Print Matching QSOs

Prints all entries which match the fields selected. The fields to be matched are shown in the Print menu. Check the box next to the fields which are to be used as keywords in the search. Remember, PPWIN matches the text in the field if the database contains the sequence of characters in the keyword.  See the description in the QSO Log section for details.

o Print All QSOs

Prints all entries in the database file.

Printing Comments

o Prompt Remarks

PPWIN prompts you for each of the 3 comments in the entry, for each entry to be printed.

o Print All Remarks

All comments are printed automatically.

o Don't Print Remarks

Comments are not printed at all.

Printing Style

o Print As QSL

PPWIN prints each entry as a QSL Label.

o Print as LOG

PPWIN prints each entry as it appears in the QSO Log.

Destination

o Print to File

PPWIN prints each entry to the specified file. The default is QSO.BUF.

o Print to Printer

PPWIN prints each entry to the printer.

o Number of Line Between Entries

PPWIN places the number of specified blank lines between each entry. If the number is specified as 99, a form feed is placed between each entry.


Scroll Back Buffer

There is a separate Scroll Back buffer for each TNC, and each radio port if you are using a DSP-2232 or PK-900 dual port TNC.

To view the contents of PC-Pakratt's Scroll Back buffer, press the PgUP key or click on the receive window's scroll bar. The Status bar will change to reflect that you are in the Scroll Back mode as shown below.  The # of lines in buffer and the current lines being displayed are shown in the lower left hand corner of the Status bar.

Use the scrollbar or Shift-PgUp and Shift-PgDn to navigate around the buffer.

The status bar shows the current Packet Channel, the # of lines in the buffer and the current lines displayed. In Packet, use the UP/DOWN Arrows or Arrow Buttons to change the Packet Channel. In non-packet modes, the UP/DOWN Arrows are disabled.

Incoming data will be held in a 10K byte temporary buffer until you exit the Scroll Back buffer. If the temporary buffer overflows, PPWIN will beep every time new data arrives and is thrown away. The data stored in the temporary buffer transferred to the Scroll Back buffer when you return to the operating window.

The following features are available in the Scroll Back buffer.

o Backward

Searches backwards through the buffer for the selected string immediately below the button.

o Forward

Searches forwards through the buffer for the selected string immediately below the button.

o Case Sensitive

If checked, text searches will be case sensitive.

o Find

Select a file to store the contents of the buffer. Once a file is selected, the filename is placed in the Edit Box above.

o

If you have selected the callsign of the station you are currently working, pressing the [image] button places the call  in the QX buffer Edit Box to the right.  A faster way to enter the callsign into the QX buffer is to point at the desired callsign with the mouse and double-click the right mouse button.  This callsign can then be used with the PgDn key for "Quick exchanges".  See the "Quick Call Exchange" section below for more information.

It is not necessary to be in the scroll back buffer to use this feature.

o Close

Close the Scroll Back buffer & restore the Status Bar to the mode you were in previously.  Pressing ESC will also close the Scroll Back buffer.

o

Saves the contents of the buffer (or the selected text) to a file specified in the Edit Box to the right.

o

Writes the buffer or selected text to the printer.

o

Copies the highlighted text into the ClipBoard.

o

Pastes the contents (up to 1024 characters) from the

ClipBoard to the transmit window in the form of a Macro.

o

Clears the Scroll Back Buffer.

While the Scroll Back Buffer is being displayed. Text can be entered in the Transmit window and the Text will be sent to the TNC and transmitted just as it would be normally.

Selecting Text

Text can be selected by moving the mouse cursor over the desired text while holding down the left mouse button. Once the text is selected, it can be copied to the ClipBoard by pressing  [image].

Text that is highlighted can be inserted in to the Quick Call Exchange Edit Box by pressing [image]. Double clicking the right mouse button while pointing to a callsign will also place the call in the Quick Call Exchange Edit Box without pressing the QX button.

Text that is copied into ClipBoard can be again copied to any Edit Box, such as the Search and QX Edit Box by pressing CTRL-INSERT. Once the text is copied into the ClipBoard, the text can be pasted into the TX window by pressing  [image] .

To clear the highlight text, click the right mouse button.

Quick Call Exchange

PPWIN helps to automate the callsign exchange process. When a callsign is entered in the Quick Call Exchange buffer, PPWIN will execute a call exchange when you press the PgDn key.  Your callsign is grabbed from the value of MYCALL (HF Packet Parameters). In AMTOR, the +?, sequence is added, in PACTOR the <Ctrl-Z> sequence is added and for other modes, a CTRL-D is appended.  The exchange is entered in to the Transmit window as a Macro.

For example, if the call entered in to the Quick Call buffer was N4ABC and your call entered into MYCALL was K4XYZ the exchange would be:

in AMTOR:  	N4ABC DE K4XYZ +?

in PACTOR:  	N4ABC DE K4XYZ ^Z

in BAUDOT, ASCII or MORSE: 	N4ABC DE K4XYZ ^D

The Ctrl-PgDn key executes the call exchange and always attaches a ^D to the end of the exchange in AMTOR and PACTOR as well as BAUDOT, MORSE and ASCII.  This is handy for the final AMTOR or PACTOR transmission of the conversation.  The ^D at the end will cause the AMTOR Link or PACTOR Connection to be terminated ending the QSO.

A Quick Call Exchange can not be executed when a Macro is currently in progress.

Text Searching

To search for a particular string in the buffer, enter the text in the Search Edit Box in the Scroll Back Status Bar. If you check the Case Sensitive Box, the search will be case sensitive. That is to say, lowercase characters are matched only to lowercase characters. If the Checkbox is not checked, the lowercase characters will be matched to both lower and uppercase characters and vice versa.

To begin the search, click on the Forward or Backward buttons. If a match is found, the line containing the match will be displayed as the 1st line at the top of the receive window and the matching text will be highlighted. If no match was found, a message box will appear stating so. To continue search, simply continue to click on either the Forward and Backward buttons.

Saving the Buffer

To save the contains of the buffer to a file, click on the [image] button. The contains will be saved to the file shown in the box next to the button. The default is BUFFER1.TXT for TNC1 (and BUFFER1A.TXT for TNC1, Port 2). If text has been highlighted, only the highlighted text will be saved.

Printing the Buffer

To print all or part of the buffer, the procedure is the same as for saving the buffer to disk except you will need to click on the [image] button to begin printing.

BBS Support

PPWIN offers support for frequent BBS users. By highlighting a message number (in the Scroll Back Buffer) or double-clicking the left mouse button while pointing at a message number, PPWIN will offer a dialog box with BBS commands.  This simplifies many common BBS operations such as READing and KILLing messages. Once a BBS command is selected, PPWIN will issue the command to the Transmit window as a macro.  A BBS command can not be issued while macro is currently being executed.

See BBS Support for more information.


BBS Support

PPWIN offers support for frequent BBS users. By highlighting a message number (in the Scroll Back Buffer) or double-clicking the left mouse button while pointing at a message number, PPWIN will display a dialog box with BBS commands as shown below.

This simplifies many common BBS operations such as READing and KILLing messages. Simply select the desired option from the dialog box above and click OK or press Enter.  Once a BBS command is selected, PPWIN will issue the command to the Transmit window as a macro.

Most BBS allow commands to be queued so you can select and execute a number of BBS commands, then close the Scroll Back buffer to begin receiving the messages. Note that all known BBS systems support the Read and Kill commands in the dialog.  The other commands may not be supported by all systems.

A BBS command can not be issued while macro is currently being executed.


File Transfers

PC-Pakratt For Windows supports both ASCII and Binary File Transfers. ASCII file transfers are supported in any mode while Binary file transfers are supported only in Packet and PACTOR.

To initiate a file transfer, press the [image] Button found in the Status Bar. When this button is pressed, the File Transfer Dialog will appear. The default file transfer mode is ASCII. The three radio buttons allow you to select  to Receive a binary file,  Xmit a binary file, or XMIT an ASCII file.   Note that ASCII files are received with the File Capture function.

Sending A File

There are several ways to specify a file to send.

1) Type the name of the file in the Edit Box.

2) Click on a file shown in the List Box.

3) Click on the Find Button to search for a file to send.

Once the filename is entered, click on the OK button to begin the transfer. Doubling clicking on a file in the List Box, selects that file and beings the transfer.

The Add button will add the file shown in the Edit Box to the List Box. PPWIN stores the names of the files shown in the List Box in a file called PP3XFER1.LIS for TNC2 and PP3XFER2.LIS for TNC2. The List Box can hold hundreds of files names.

The Delete Button removes the file in the Edit Box from the file PP3XFER1.LIS (or PP3XFER2.LIS).

To close the File Transfer Menu Dialog without transferring a file, click on the Cancel button.

Once the transfer process begins, the File Transfer Menu Dialog will close and the File Transfer Dialog will open. This Dialog Box shows the status of the transfer; the name of the file being sent and the number of bytes sent. The transfer can be aborted by clicking on the Cancel button. The status of the link is also shown  if the TNC is in Packet.

While a file is being sent in packet, you are free to change packet channels and carry on a QSO on a different channel.

Do not enter text on the same channel as a Binary file transfer. This will corrupt the file and probably abort the transfer as well.

Receiving a File

To receive an ASCII file, capture the data as you would any other received data. The best way is to turn on the File Capture and save the incoming data to disk by clicking on the [image] button.  When in Packet, data from all channels is saved to disk regards of the display state (single channel or all channels).  You can also let the Scroll Back Buffer catch the data and save the text to disk from there. This way you can save data coming from only 1 Packet channel.

To receive a Binary file, select the Receive Binary File Button and click on OK. You can specify the name of the file to store the incoming data in by entering it into the Edit Box. The name of the file is transferred from the sending station. If the filename exists, you will be prompted for a new filename. If you do not specify a different filename, the file will be over written. While receiving a Binary file in packet, you are free to move to another Packet channel and carry on a QSO.

Do not enter text on the same channel that is receiving a binary file. This will potentially corrupt the transfer and probably will abort the transfer.

In PACTOR you must be connected to another station in order to transfer binary files.  Since there are no logical channels in PACTOR, the file transfer must complete before any text can sent to the other station.


Mheard & Channel Status
Mheard Listing and Channel Status

The Mheard listing and Channel Status Dialog contains two List boxes. The List Box on the left shows the status of each of the packet channels. The right List Box contains the stations heard by your TNC.

To Connect to a station in the MHEARD list, double click the left mouse button on the callsign. PC-Pakratt For Windows will close the dialog box and will call the Packet Connect Dialog to begin the connect process. The connect will take place on the current Packet channel unless a channel is selected from the Channel Status List Box.

To change Packet channels, double click on the channel shown in the Channel Status List Box.

If the TNC is a DSP-2232 or PK-900, the callsigns heard from both Port 1 and Port 2 are shown in the channel status. If you choose a callsign which is heard on Port 2, the connect process will take place on Port 2. Likewise, if the call was heard on Port 1, the connect process will take place on Port. This can be overridden by selecting a channel in the Channel Status List Box prior to selecting a callsign. Calls from Port 2 are identified by "p2" before the callsign.

The Connect Dialog will appear just as if you  pressed [image] from the Packet Status Bar.  USERS must be set to a value other than 1 to allow incoming connects from more than one other packet station.


Macros

The Macro Dialog contains a List Box all of the macros that currently exist for a particular TNC. Each TNC has it's own Macro File and it's own set of Macros.  If the TNC is a PK-900 or DSP-2232, the macros are shared between Port 1 and Port 2.

Up to 50 macros can be stored in the macro file. The Macro files can be changed from the Program Files option from the Configure Menu.

To Execute a macro, click the left mouse button on the name of the macro you wish to execute and then click on the OK Button. You can also double click on the macro name to execute the macro.

Click on the Quit Button to close the dialog box if you do not wish to execute any macros.

The following macro names has a special meaning for PC-Pakratt for Windows.

CQ-AMTOR....CQ macro for AMTOR

CQ-BAUDOT...CQ macro for BAUDOT

CQ-ASCII....CQ macro for ASCII

CQ-PACTOR...CQ macro for PACTOR

CQ-MORSE....CQ macro for MORSE

SK-AMTOR....Terminate link macro for AMTOR

SK-BAUDOT...Terminate link macro for BAUDOT

SK-ASCII....Terminate link macro for ASCII

SK-PACTOR...Terminate link macro for PACTOR

SK-MORSE....Terminate link macro for MORSE

EQUIP-LIST...Equipment list macro

AMTOR, BAUDOT, ASCII and MORSE Status Bars all have a CQ, SK and EQ Button. When the CQ or SK Button is clicked in AMTOR, the macro CQ-AMTOR (or SK-AMTOR) is executed.

The EQUIP-LIST macro in generic to all operating modes.

PPWIN also allows you to assign Macros to the ALT-1 through ALT-0 keys. This is done by beginning the macro name with M1- (for ALT-1), M2- (for ALT-2) and so forth. These macros are not specific to any operating mode.

For example to attach a macro to ALT-1, you would title your macro M1-MYMACRO. To attach a macro to ALT-5, you would title your macro M5-MYMACRO.

Once a macro is executing, the Status Bar displays the word "Macro". A macro can be canceled by clicking [image]  (on the Status Bar) or typing ALT-M.

To Edit a macro, select the macro from the List Box, then click on the Edit Button. The Macro Edit Dialog will then appear. From here you can edit both the macro name and the contents of the macro.

To add a new macro, click on the Add Button. The Macro Edit Dialog will appear and you can begin to create a new macro.

To Delete a macro, select the macro from the List Box then click on the Delete button. The selected macro will be removed from the List Box and deleted from the file.

See the Macro Edit section for more information on Macros.


Adding & Editing Macros

The Macro Edit Dialog allows you to create a new macro or edit an existing macro. The Macro Edit Dialog is selected when you click on the Add or Edit Button in the Macro Dialog.  Once inside the Macro Edit Dialog,  the procedures for creating and editing macros are the same.

To enter or change the title of the macro, move the cursor to the Title Edit Box using the tab key or the mouse. Enter or edit the existing macro name.

Macro titles are not limited by MS-DOS and can be up to 40 characters in length.

To enter or change the macro text, move the cursor to the bottom Edit Box using the tab key or the mouse. Do not hit the ENTER key as ENTER is equivalent to clicking the mouse on the OK button (in a Windows Dialog Box). To place a carriage return in to an Edit Box, type CTRL-ENTER instead. Macros can be up to 1024 characters. The Edit Box will not accept more than 1024 characters. You can also copy text into the Edit Box from the ClipBoard by typing CTRL-INS.

Unlike earlier versions of PC-Pakratt, the Windows Edit Box can not accept most control characters. To get around this problem, PPWIN has a special convention for handling control  characters. The control sequence must be enclosed by [ ] and the control sequence is entered as ASCII.

For example, to enter a Control-D into your macro, type [^D].

The control sequence must be enclosed in [ ] or PC-Pakratt for Windows will sent the characters ^ and D to the TNC rather than the CTRL-D character.

PC-Pakratt for Windows allows you to directly enter TNC commands into your macro.  This is especially handy with the AUTOSTART and AUTOEXIT macros where commands such as 'Monitor 0' can be entered to automatically disable packet monitoring when quitting PC-Pakratt for Windows.

As with control characters, the TNC command must be enclosed by [ ]. The TNC command must however be specified using the Host Mode Mnemonic. Host Mode mnemonics are listed in the command section of the TNC operating manual and in the TNC Parameters section of these Help Files.

As an example, to tell the TNC to go into FEC mode (such as for calling CQ-AMTOR), enter into your macro [FE]. If you look up the FEC command in the TNC Parameters section of these help files, you will notice that the Host mode command is 'FE'.  PPWIN takes care of changing the Status Bar. When a TNC parameter is changed, the value is updated in the program as well.

As an example, to enter an AMTOR FEC CQ call, you would enter [FE]CQ CQ CQ CQ CQ DE K1ABC K1ABC (KABC KABC)[^D]

Note that the macro is ended with a CTRL-D. If you terminate the macro with the TNC command [AM], the TNC will be placed in AMTOR standby before all text is transmitted. The CTRL-D allows the TNC is transmit all the characters in it's buffer before going back to receive.


PC-Pakratt will look for invalid or dangerous commands and print an Error message if it finds one (such as RESET).

To put an control character inside of a TNC command, place the control sequence in [ ] as you would normally. As an Example:

[Hello World [^M]This is KJ4ABC]

Your TNC manual will contain more detail on your TNC's commands and parameters in the Command Summary Appendix. The TNC manual and PC-Pakratt for Windows parameter help also contains the Host Mode mnemonics for each command or parameter.

See also Macros.


Setting Window Colors

PC-Pakratt for Windows allows you to change the colors of the text being received from the TNC as well as the echoed text and TNC status messages. The colors are unique for each TNC and each logical channel.

Open the Configuration menu and then select either TNC1 or TNC2 and then choose Set Color.  The TNC Color Dialog contains three List Boxes, each List Box contains the available channels for your TNC. The left List Box controls the color of the incoming (receive) data. This List Box also controls the color for the monitor channel. The right List Box controls the color of the TNC status messages such as 'CONNECTED to callsign' sent to you from the TNC. The middle List Box controls transmit data which is echoed back from the TNC.

Above each List Box is text which identifies the channel selected. The color of the text shows the foreground and background colors for the selected channel.  Select a channel from any of the 3 List Boxes before making your color selections.

The two rows of 16 colored buttons control the foreground and background colors. The top row controls the foreground color of the text and the bottom row controls the background color. To change the color of the selected text in the above List Boxes, click on the appropriately colored button. The channel text  above the List Box will change color to reflect your choice.

In AMTOR, ASCII, Baudot PACTOR and Morse, the received text is sent to the Monitor channel so it can be separated from the Packet text  received on a particular channel. Echoed data and link messages are sent to channel 0.

To force your changes to take effect, click on the OK Button. You will then be asked if you want to save these changes to the configuration file. If you click on NO, the changes will be used for this time only and will not be saved for future use.


Progam Files Configuration
Program File Configuration

The Program  File Configuration Dialog controls the behavior of PC-Pakratt for Windows. This Dialog allows you specify the connect  files, QSO log files, macro files, capture files, buffer save files and parameter files. Each TNC has it's own Program Configuration settings.

Program Files

The list of files below are the files PC-Pakratt for Windows uses to configure itself and to read and/or store data from the TNC. References to Port 2 is applicable only if the TNC connected to the COM Port is a DSP-2232 or a PK-900, otherwise the Port 2 Buttons and Edit Boxes will be disabled.

o AMTOR Connect File

Specifies the filename which contains the list of calls displayed in the AMTOR Link Menu (ARQ & SFEC). See also AMTOR Operation.

o Buffer File

Specifies the filename which the Scroll Back Buffer uses to save text to disk. See also Scroll Back Buffer.

o Port 2 Buffer File

Specifies the filename which the DSP-2232 or PK-900 Port 2 Scroll Back Buffer uses to save text to disk.

o Capture File

Specifies the filename which PPWIN saves incoming data to during a file Capture. See PACKET Operation, AMTOR Operation, BAUDOT/ASCII Operation, PACTOR Operation and MORSE Operation.

o Port 2 Capture File

Specifies the filename which PPWIN saves incoming data from Port  2 of a DSP-2232 or PK-900 during a file Capture.

o Macro File

Specifies the filename which contain PPWIN macros. See also MACROS.

o Mail Drop File

Specifies the filename which PPWIN save and restore Mail Drop messages to. See also Mail Drop Operation.

o TNC1 Params File

Specifies the filename which will contain the TNC parameters for TNC1. See also Parameters Menu.

o Packet Connect File

Specifies the filename which contains the list of calls displayed in the Packet Connect Dialog (HF & VHF Packet). See also Packet Operation.

o PACTOR Connect File

Specifies the filename which contains the list of calls displayed in the PACTOR Connect Dialog. See also PACTOR Operation.

o QSO Log File

Specifies the filename which contains PPWIN's QSO Log database file.  You may want to change this if you wish to use the log files from PC-Pakratt II for DOS.

o QSO Default File

Specifies the filename which contains PPWIN's QSO Log defaults. The defaults stored in this file are pasted into the log when the QSO Log DEFAULTS button is clicked..

If you do not like the default choices PPWIN uses for any of the files, the filenames can be changed by re-typing a new filename in the appropriate Edit Box. Also, if you press the appropriate button, the File Dialog will appear and allow you to look through the directories on you disk to select a File.


Progam Configuration
Program Configuration

The Program  File Configuration Dialog controls the behavior of PC-Pakratt for Windows. Here, the size of the Scroll Back buffer is specified, whether the TNC window(s) are automatically opened when the program starts, the name of the startup and exit macros and whether these macros are executed. Each TNC has it's own Program Configuration settings.

Receive Buffer Size

PC-Pakratt for Windows allow you to specify the size of the Scroll Back Buffer for the TNC attached the each COM Port. If that TNC is DSP-2232 or PK-900, the size of the Port 2 buffer can also be changed. Buffer sizes can be between 32K (32767) and 256K (262144) bytes. The changes will not be effective if the TNC operation window is open. The window must be closed then opened for the change to take effect.

Startup and Exit Macros

PC-Pakratt for Windows supports Startup and Exit Macros. The Startup macro (AUTOST) executes only when the TNC window is opened for the very first time. The Exit macro executes just before the program terminates. If the TNC is a DSP-2232 or PK-900, the macros execute only on the opening and closing of Radio Port 1. These macros can be used to set the mode of the TNC or any of the TNC's parameters. For example, if you want to have you window always open up in with the Packet monitor set to 4, your macro would contain [MN4].

To enable the Startup Macro, click on the Startup Macro Check Box. Click on the Exit Macro Check Box to enable the Exit Macro.  See the Macro section for more information.

The Startup and Exit Macros can be selected from the list of macros stored in you Macro File or typed in into the Edit box. The default automatic startup macro is called AUTOST and the default automatic exit macro is called AUTOEXIT.  PPWIN does not prevent you from specifying a macro that does not yet exist. The program will later complain however if you attempt to execute a non-existent macro.

Automatic Opening of TNC Windows

PPWIN allows you to have the TNC Operating window open automatically when the program first executes. If the TNC is a DSP-2232 or PK-900, you can open both radio Port 1 and Port 2 windows. The Auto Open Port 1 and Auto Open Port 2 Check Boxes enable this feature.

Allowing Beeps

PPWIN allows you to enable or disable beeps which are generated as a responce to the program receiving a ^G character. Since PPWIN utilizes the midi resources (sound card) of your computer, these beeps could interfere with other programs which also attempt to use these resources. Beeps are enabled/disabled by TNC and port, allowing you to turn off beeps only on certains windows.

Disabling beeps does not have any effect on the the setting of CONALARM.

When using LogWindows in conjuction with PPWIN, it is best to turn off beeps to the window communicating with LogWindows so not to interfere with LogWindows attempts to use the midi resources.


Selecting Modems

The DSP or PK-900 modems can be selected from many of the Parameter Dialogs.  Each of these dialogs contains the respective modem parameters for each mode. For example, the Packet Parameters Dialogs contain the parameters QVPACKET and QHPACKET. The AMTOR Parameters Dialog contains QTOR and QTDM.  The Baudot/ASCII/Morse Parameters Dialog contains QRTTY, QWIDE and QMORSE.  The Parameters Dialog for the DSP-1232 and -2232 contains the QPTOR command.

To change the modem, for example QVPACKET, click on the QVPACKET button. The Modem Dialog will then be displayed. The dialog contains a List Box which is filled with the modems available to your DSP or PK-900 TNC. Double click on the modem to select it and return back to the parameter dialog. Now, when you click OK, QVPACKET will be updated. If the TNC mode is VHF Packet, the parameter MODEM will be also be set to QVPACKET. If the TNC is in AMTOR and you change QTOR, MODEM will be set to the value of QTOR.  Remember you can always get a DIRECTory of available modems by clicking on a Q-modem button.

PPWIN polls the DSP or PK-900 for the modem directory if the file PPW1.MOD does not exist (PPW2.MOD for TNC2). If the modem firmware date is different than that stored in the file(s), the file(s) are re-created with the new modem directory. The modem directory stored in these files are what PPWIN uses in the Modem Dialog.


TNC StartUp Configuration

When PC-Pakratt for Windows first runs, it will display a Dialog which displays two Drop Down List Boxes. The List Boxes allow you to select the COM Port to be used for TNC 1 and TNC 2.

Once a COM Port is selected, PPWIN will attempt to communicate with the TNC. If a connection is established, PPWIN will determine the TNC typed attached (PK-232, DSP-2232 & etc.). PPWIN will fill in the TNC model and value of TBAUD determined in the appropriate fields in the Dialog.

If the COM Port is set to None, PPWIN will assume no TNC is attached.

If PPWIN can not communicate with the TNC, it will also assume no TNC is attached.

When you have finished specifying the COM Ports for each TNC, press the OK. PPWIN will create a .CFG and create the parameter files for each TNC. PPWIN will also create CQ macros for each mode automatically.


CONTENTS

PC-Pakratt Operation     TNC Parameters

Welcome to PPWIN         Packet Parameters

Help Conventions         AMTOR Parameters

Files Menu               Baudot/ASCII/Morse Parameters

Edit Menu                PACTOR Parameters

TNC Menu                 Mail Drop Parameters

Parameters Menu          Dual Port Parameters

Configure Menu           Misc. Parameters

Tools Menu               NAVTEX/TDM Parameters

Window Menu              Dumb Terminal Parameters

Help Menu                Signal Parameters

Operating Windows        Configuration

Packet Operation         Configure Menu

AMTOR Operation          TNC Configuration

Baudot/ASCII Operation   Setting TNC Parameters

PACTOR Operation

SIAM Operation           Macros

MORSE Operation          Macros

NAVTEX/TDM Operation     Adding & Editing Macros

Dumb Terminal Operation

Packet Monitor Window

Scroll Back Buffer       MailDrop Operation

Scroll Back Buffer       MailDrop Operation

BBS Operation            Editing MailDrop Msgs

                         Sending MailDrop Msgs

QSO Log

QSO Log                  Modems

QSO Log Print Menu       Selecting Modems

Miscellaneous

Gateway Operation

PPWIN.INI Parameters

LogWindows Interface

ANSI Graphics


Welcome to PcPakratt For Windows
PC-Pakratt for Windows©(TM)

PC-Pakratt for Windows is designed to take advantage of the non preemptive multitasking environment Windows has to offer. PC-Pakratt for Windows, referred to as PPWIN throughout, offers a graphical interface for your AEA TNC and makes your job of operating much easier.

Here are some of the features of PC-Pakratt for Windows:

o 	Dual port operation with AEA's DSP-2232 or PK-900.

o 	Dual TNC operation with any of AEA's TNCs including the PK-232, PK-900, DSP-1232/2232, PK-88, PCB-88, PK-96 and the PK-12.

o 	Independent operating windows for each TNC and for each radio port on the DSP-2232 or PK-900.

o	Mode dependent status bars and customized buttons to facilitate operation.

o	Separate TNC parameter values for VHF and HF Packet.

o	ASCII and Binary File transfers in Packet and PACTOR.  ASCII transfers in all other modes. Packet File transfers can take place while conversing on another Packet channel.

o	Separate CQ and SK macros for AMTOR, BAUDOT, ASCII,  MORSE & PACTOR.  Custom buttons in the status bar to execute these macros. PC-Pakratt for Windows executes the proper macro for each mode.

o	Support for quick call sign exchanges.

o	Up to 50 macros for each TNC.

o	Support for automatic Packet Node connections.

o	Separate QSO logs for each TNC.

o	Separate transmit buffers for each Packet channel.

o	Separate Packet Monitor channel.

o	Ability to 'Paste' text from the ClipBoard to the Transmit buffer and 'Copy' text from the Scroll Back buffer.

o	Ability to send a file to the Mail Drop and save individual messages in the Mail Drop to an ASCII file.  Mail Drop messages can be saved to disk when the program exits and re-loaded when the program runs.

o	Support for BBS operation; click on a message # to automatically bring up a 'Quick BBS' command menu.

o	Supports quick callsign exchange in Morse, Baudot, ASCII, AMTOR and PACTOR.

o	Scroll Back buffer size (default 64K) can be increased to 256K bytes for each operating window.

o	ANSI Graphics Support.

o	Supports communications with AEAs LogWindows Program.

o	Monitor window to display unproto packets while operating packet on any TNC or Port.


Help Conventions
Help File Conventions

Certain conventions are used throughout this Help file.

Blue... refers to keys on your keyboard. For example: Press ESC means to press the ESCAPE key on your keyboard.

Slate... refers to characters you type exactly. For example: Type [HB 1200].

Magenta refers to words you fill in with your own text. For example: Type DE your callsign.

Red..... refers to a hint or a warning. For example:

Don't turn your TNC off while the PPWIN is running.

Green... refers to a Cross Reference. For example: See Also Index.

BOLD.... refers to buttons or menu items.

This help file will usually refer to buttons and icons by displaying the actual button or icon. The buttons in the help file are only images and are not really active.


Files Menu

This menu allows you to load and/or save the TNC1 and TNC2 parameters.  This menu also allows you to change the default printer setup.

o Load TNC1 Parameters

Reads the TNC1 parameters from disk. If Fast Initialization is on, the TNC will be re-initialized.

o Load TNC2 Parameters

Reads all the TNC2 parameters from disk. If Fast Initialization is on, the TNC will be re-initialized.

o Load All Parameters

Reads both TNC1 and TNC2 parameters from disk. If Fast Initialization is on, the TNCs will be re-initialized.

o Save TNC1 Parameters

Saves the TNC1 parameters to disk.

o Save TNC2 Parameters

Saves the TNC2 parameters to disk.

o Save All Parameters

Saves both TNC1 and TNC2 parameters to disk.

o Load/Init TNC1 Parameters

Reads all the parameters from disk and initializes TNC1 if the operating  window is open.

o Load/Init TNC2 Parameters

Reads all the parameters from disk and initializes TNC2 if the operating window is open.

o Load/Init All Parameters

Reads all the parameters from disk and initializes the TNCs which have windows open.

o Printer Setup

Calls the Windows Printer Setup. This is the same as opening the Control Panel and choosing Printer Setup.

o Exit

Causes the program to terminate.

When the program exits and if you have specified an exit macro, the macro will execute before the program terminates. The exit macro will not execute if you double-click on the  in the upper left hand corner of the operating window.

Also, if the Save Mail drop messages box was checked, the program will save any Mail drop messages to disk when quitting the program. If the Host Mode on Exit box is not checked, the TNC will be placed back into Human mode.

See also TNC Configuration and Macros.


Edit Menu

This menu allows you to Copy selected text from the scroll-back buffer to the ClipBoard and/or paste text from the ClipBoard into the transmit buffer.

o Copy

Copies the selected text from the scroll-back buffer into the ClipBoard.  Once the text is in the ClipBoard it may be pasted into the transmit buffer or used in another Windows application.

o Paste

Pastes text data from the ClipBoard into the transmit buffer to be sent.  Data in the ClipBoard may originate from the scroll back buffer with the Copy command (see above) or from another Windows application.

See also the Scroll Back Buffer.


TNC Menu

To begin operating, a TNC window must be first opened by choosing the TNC to operate. PPWIN supports up to two TNCs and with a DSP-2232 or a PK-900,  a separate operating window for each radio port.

o Open TNC1:DSP-2232

Opens TNC1 operating window

(In this example TNC1 is a DSP-2232)

o Open TNC1 Port 2

Opens TNC1: Port 2 operating window

(if applicable)

o Open TNC2:PK-88

Opens TNC2 operating window

(In this example TNC2 is a PK-88)

o Open TNC2 Port 2

Opens TNC2, Port 2 operating window, if applicable.

(The PK-88 has only one port so this will be grayed)

o Open Monitor Window

Opens the Packet Monitor Window to allow displaying of unproto packets from any TNC or port.

PPWIN will identify the type of TNC that is attached to TNC1 and TNC2 when the program is run for the first time. For example, if a PK-232MBX is attached to TNC1, DSP-2232 would be replaced with TNC1:PK-232MBX and TNC1 Port 2  would be grayed and inactive. (Since the two radio ports on the PK-232 do not support simultaneous operation)

Once a TNC window has been opened, the menu will change  to Close TNC1:DSP-2232.

See also:

TNC Configuration        	Packet Operation

       	BAUDOT/ASCII Operation   	SIAM Operation

AMTOR Operation 	PACTOR Operation

MORSE Operation	Signal Analysis Operation

     	Dumb Terminal Operation	Packet Monitor Window


Parameters Menu

The Parameters Menu will allow you to change the values for the TNC's parameters and the state of the TNC.

o TNC1 HF Packet Params

Contains most of the HF Packet parameters.

o TNC1 HF Packet Msg Params

Contains parameters such as BTEXT, CTEXT and UNPROTO as well as CFROM, DFROM, MFROM, MTO and MBX.

o TNC1 Port 2 Params

All Port 2 parameters.

(Only applies to a DSP-2232 or PK-900)

o TNC1 VHF Packet Params

Contains most of the VHF Packet parameters.

o TNC1 Hi Speed Packet Params

Contains most of the VHF Packet parameters for high baud rate operation.

o TNC1 VHF Packet Msg Params

Contains parameters such as BTEXT, CTEXT and UNPROTO as well as CFROM, DFROM, MFROM, MTO  and MBX.

o TNC1 Hi Speed Packet Msg Params

Contains parameters such as BTEXT, CTEXT and  UNPROTO as well as CFROM, DFROM, MFROM, MTO and MBX. for high baud rate operation

o TNC1 Port 2 VHF Params

All Port 2 VHF parameters.

(Only applies to a DSP-2232 or PK-900)

o TNC1 Port 2 Hi Speed Params

All Port 2  parameters for high baud rate operation.

(Only applies to a DSP-2232 or PK-900)

o TNC1 AMTOR/NAVTEX/TDM Params

AMTOR, NAVTEX and TDM parameters.

o TNC1 PACTOR Params

PACTOR  parameters. (requires PACTOR firmware)

o TNC1 BAUDOT/ASCII/MORSE Parms

BAUDOT, ASCII and MORSE parameters.

o TNC1 Misc. Params

Miscellaneous TNC parameters.

o TNC2 HF Packet Params

All HF Packet parameters.

o TNC2 HF Packet Msg Params

Contains parameters such as BTEXT, CTEXT and  UNPROTO as well as CFROM, DFROM, MFROM, MTO and MBX.

o TNC2 Port 2 HF Params

All Port 2 parameters.

(Only applies to a DSP-2232 or PK-900)

o TNC2 VHF Packet Params

All VHF Packet parameters.

o TNC2 Hi Speed Packet Params

Contains most of the VHF Packet parameters for high baud rate operation.

o TNC2 VHF Packet Msg Params

Contains parameters such as BTEXT, CTEXT and  UNPROTO as well as CFROM, DFROM, MFROM, MTO and MBX.

o TNC2 Hi Speed Packet Msg Params

Contains parameters such as BTEXT, CTEXT and  UNPROTO as well as CFROM, DFROM, MFROM, MTO and MBX. for high baud rate operation

o TNC2 Port 2 VHF Params

All Port 2 VHF parameters.

(Only applies to a DSP-2232 or PK-900)

o TNC2 Port 2 Hi Speed Params

All Port 2  parameters for high baud rate operation.

(Only applies to a DSP-2232 or PK-900)

o TNC2 AMTOR/NAVTEX/TDM Params

AMTOR, NAVTEX and TDM parameters.

o TNC2 PACTOR Params

PACTOR  parameters. (requires PACTOR firmware)

o TNC2 BAUDOT/ASCII/MORSE Params

BAUDOT, ASCII and MORSE parameters.

o TNC2 Misc Params

Miscellaneous TNC parameters.

o TNC1 Mail drop Params

All MailDrop parameters for TNC1.

o TNC2 Mail drop Params

All MailDrop parameters for TNC2.

A TNC window must be open before any of the TNC parameter dialogs can be accessed. The TNC Port 2 parameter menu items will be disabled (grayed) unless the TNC is a DSP-2232 or

PK-900.  The PACTOR parameter menu items will be disabled if the firmware in the TNC does not support PACTOR.


Configure Menu

o Load Configuration

Loads the program configuration for both TNCs from disk.

o Save Configuration

Saves the program configuration for both TNCs to disk.

o TNC1

o Set Color

Set the received text colors for TNC1.

o TNC Configuration

Set the TNC type, COM Port, baud rate & program parameters for TNC1.

o Program Files

Set program filenames and paths for TNC1.

o Program Configuration

Set Port Auto Open, start/exit macros,  & RX buffer size for TNC1.

o QSO Log Defaults

Set default values for the TNC1 QSO log.

o TNC2

o Set Color

Set the received text colors for TNC2.

o TNC Configuration

Set the TNC type, COM Port, baud rate & program parameters for TNC2.

o Program Files

Set program filenames and paths for TNC2.

o Program Configuration

Set Port Auto Open, start/exit macros & RX buffer size for TNC2.

o QSO Log Defaults

Set default values for the TNC2 QSO log.

o Set Font

Brings up the Font selection menu for both TNCs.

o Choose Font

This allows you to set the font used in the receive and transmit windows. Note that Windows will not show the program default font (OEM Fixed Font).

The TERMINAL fonts which can be installed using the FONTS application in the Windows Control Panel will show the IBM screen graphics characters used in many MS-DOS applications and in PACTOR pictures.

o Select OEM Fixed Font

Reset to the default OEM Fixed Font.

The OEM Fixed Font properly displays control characters and the IBM screen graphic characters. This font is a fixed pitch font.

o Choose Printer Font

Selects a font to be used in printing.

o Specify Editor

Allows you to specify your favorite text editor (or any other application of your choosing) that can be called from the Tools menu.  The default is Write.exe.

o Reset Rx Window Colors

Allows you to reset the Rx Window colors back to the current defaults. When receiving ANSI graphics, the screen colors may be left at some undesirable color. This features allows you  to reinstate the default colors for the Rx window.

The TNC type, COM Port, and baud rate should be set first.

PPWIN supports COM Ports 1-4. The setup of these COM Ports must be done through the Windows 3.1 Control Panel 'Port Setup' applet.  For OS/2 2.1, refer to the OS/2 help for the COM and VCOM driver parameters.

Do not assign a TNC to a COM Port which shares the same port address or IRQ with another COM Port which is in use !


Tools Menu

The Tools menu allows you access to several of the more popular Windows  applications and applets.

o Control Panel

Call the Windows Control Panel applet.

o Notepad

Call Windows Notepad.

o Write.exe

Call Windows Write.

The program called here can be changed with the "Specify Editor" option in the Configuration Menu.

o ClipBoard

Call the Windows ClipBoard Viewer.

o Sync With Log Windows

Polls Log Windows To begin commications. If Log Windows is running, the in the TNC Status Dialog will change from [image] to  [image].

o Terminate Log Windows Link


Windows Menu
Window Menu

o Arrange Icons

Arranges the icons at the bottom of the Main Window.

o Cascade

Cascades the open windows.

o Tile Vertically

Tiles windows vertically.

o Tile Horizontally

Tiles windows horizontally.

o Save TNC1 Port 1 Position

Saves the location and size of the operating window for TNC1 port-1.

o Save TNC1 Port 2 Position

Saves the location and size of the operating window for TNC1 port-2.

o Save TNC2 Port 1 Position

Saves the location and size of the operating window for TNC2 port-1.

o Save TNC2 Port 2 Position

Saves the location and size of the operating window for TNC2 port-2.

o Save Program Position

Saves the location and size of the operating window for the PC-Pakratt for windows program.

o Save Monitor Window Position

Saves the location and size of the Packet monitor window.


Help Menu

o Welcome to PC-Pakratt For Windows

Calls the Windows Help program and displays the Welcome to PC-Pakratt For Windows topic.

o Technical Support

Shows how to obtain technical support for AEA products.

o Firmware

Shows the program version and the TNC(s) firmware dates. (If the TNC is open)

o About...

Shows the Copyright information and program author.


TNC Configuration

The TNC Configuration Dialog contains three List Boxes, the first to define the TNC model, the second to define the COM Port and the third to define the baud rate between the TNC and the computer (TBAUD). This Dialog also contains switches (Check Boxes) which controls how the program interacts with the TNC.

TNC Models

The TNC List Box allows you to specify the TNC  model attached to TNC1 or TNC2 (depending on which configuration Dialog you opened). PC-Pakratt for Windows supports all of AEA's controllers from the PK-88 to the DSP-2232.

The TNC model can not be changed while the TNC operating window is open.

COM Port Selection

The COM Port List Box allows you to specify which COM Port to use for the specified TNC (TNC1 or TNC2).

The TNC COM Port can not be changed while the TNC operating window is open.

Do not assign a TNC to a COM Port which shares the same port address or IRQ with another COM Port which is in use !

Windows 3.1 and OS/2 2.1 handle COM port contention problem fairly well.  You will not be able to access the TNC if there is an IRQ conflict.

In Windows 3.1, the COM port addresses and IRQ numbers are defined in the Ports applet in the Control Panel. If you plan to use COM Port 3 or 4, check the setup of these ports as they may not represent your COM board setup.  For OS/2 2.1, refer to the OS/2 help for the COM and VCOM drivers.

If the COM Port selected is NONE, PPWIN will run in demo mode. PPWIN will not attempt to communicate with your TNC.

Computer Baud Rate

The baud rate between the computer and TNC (TBAUD) must also be specified. The baud rate between the computer and TNC must be agree before the two can communicate. If you try to access your TNC and the baud rates are different you will receive an error message saying that the TNC can not be accessed.

If the operating window is open, PPWIN will issue the proper TBAUD command, RESTART the TNC and reset the computer's COM port.

Program Switches

 Also in this Dialog are Check Boxes which determine how the TNC and Program operate. If the Check Box is checked, the program acts as follows:

o Echo Packets

Transmitted packets are echoed to the receive window as they are sent to the TNC.

o Echo Port 2 Packets

Transmitted packets are echoed as they are sent to the DSP-2232s or PK-900s Radio Port 2.

o UTC TNC Time

Sets the TNC time to UTC time and highlights the UTC time and date displayed in the operating window Status Bar.  When this box is unchecked, the local time entered in your PC is highlighted and used to set the TNC time.

o UTC Port 2 Time

Highlights the UTC time and displays the UTC date in the operating window Status Bar for radio port 2. The TNC time is controlled by UTC TNC Time.

(DSP-2232 or PK-900 only).

o Fast Initialization

TNC parameters are not initialized when the TNC operating window is opened.  When not checked, the parameters are initialized each time the TNC window is opened.  Fast Initialization will save time when starting PC-Pakratt for Windows but is not recommended if other programs besides PC-Pakratt for Windows will be used.

Note that the parameters are always loaded if the TNC has been reset or is not in the Host mode when PC-Pakratt for Windows starts.

o Host Mode on Exit

The TNC is left in Host Mode when the program terminates. When not checked, the TNC is placed back in Human Mode

Remaining in Host mode after exiting the program is a good idea.  It allows the TNC to save data that it may receive when the computer is off such as when another packet station connects to you.

If you will be using other programs besides PC-Pakratt for Windows however, you may want to un-check this box.  This may make starting your other program easier.  Remember though, if you do not remain in the Host mode on Exiting the program, you may loose data when the computer is off.

o Save/Restore Mail drop

PC-Pakratt for Windows can automatically save any messages in the Mail Drop to disk when the program terminates and re-load the TNC when the program starts. The TNC is RESET when messages are loaded in to the TNC to prevent duplicate messages.

If you have the battery back-up in your TNC enabled, we recommend that you do not check this box and simply let the battery hold your MailDrop messages.  If you have disabled the battery back-up to make it easier to run other programs besides PC-Pakratt for Windows, then you may want to check the box and automatically save and restore your MailDrop messages..

o Dumb Term Initialization

When checked, the TNC is initialized after leaving the Dumb terminal mode.  This is a good idea to prevent any problems that might occur from accidentally changing any parameters in the Dumb Terminal mode.

o Show Unknown Command Errors

When checked, TNC Unknown Command errors are displayed when they occur. This option may be turned off for TNCs with older firmware or without the PACTOR option installed.

o Show Not While Connected Errors

When checked, TNC 'Not While Connected' errors are displayed during initialization. This option may be turned on if desired, when this box is checked, error messages will be displayed during initialization should another station be connected to the TNC.

o Auto QSO Check

When checked and if the QSO Log is open,  PC-Pakratt for Windows will display the QSO information for the station just connected to (in Packet Only).  Since each TNC has it's own log, the respective QSO Dialog must be opened first.  This also works when the QSO Log is minimized.

Be sure and select the SAVE parameters option if you want the changes you make to be saved for the next time you run the program.


Setting TNC Parameters

PC-Pakratt for Windows maintains separate parameter files for TNC1 and TNC2 parameters. The parameters for both TNCs  can be loaded or saved individually or in concert. The parameter file names are specified in the Program Configuration Dialog).

The parameter Dialogs are divided by operating mode.

HF Packet Parameters

VHF Packet Parameters

Dual Port Parameters

Port 2 HF Parameters (If TNC is Dual Port)

Port 2 VHF Parameters (If TNC is Dual Port)

AMTOR Parameters

NAVTEX/TDM Parameters

PACTOR Parameters

BAUDOT/ASCII/MORSE Parameters

Mail Drop Parameters

Dumb Terminal Parameters

Signal Analysis Parameters

Miscellaneous Parameters

VHF Packet parameters are loaded in to the TNC when the TNC mode is changed to VHF Packet. Likewise, HF Packet parameters are loaded when the TNC is changed to HF Packet . PPWIN remembers the last Packet mode used so parameters are only reloaded when you go from HF to VHF packet , not when you go to HF Packet to AMTOR and back to HF Packet.

Some parameters show up in multiple parameter dialogs because they affect more than one mode.  Because of this, those parameters which are in multiple dialogs will affect other modes.  Changes to the parameters will immediately be sent to the TNC when you press the OK button. For example, if you change the value of MYCALL, PPWIN will update the TNC when you click on the OK button to close the Dialog. If PPWIN is in VHF Packet mode, changing any of the HF Packet parameters will effect the state of the TNC since the TNC is updated when the OK button is clicked.

Parameters can be saved or re-loaded from disk by selecting LOAD PARAMETERS and SAVE PARAMETERS in the File Menu. The TNC can be re-initialized by selecting LOAD/INIT TNC1 PARAMETERS, LOAD/INIT TNC2 PARAMETER and LOAD/INIT ALL PARAMETERS.

TNC parameter Dialogs can not be accessed while in Dumb Terminal mode since the TNC is no longer in Host mode.


Packet Operation

Key Definitions:

ALT-A: Calls the MailDrop Dialog.

ALT-B: Sets the Packet radio baud rate HBAUD.

ALT-I: Issues an ID command to the TNC.

ALT-M: Calls the Macro Dialog.

ALT-Q: Refreshes the windows.

ALT-R: Clears Receive Window and Scroll Back Buffer.

ALT-S: Holds/Releases Transmit Buffer.

ALT-U: Initiates a File Capture.

ALT-V: Toggles Radio ports on the DSP-1232 Only.

ALT-X: Calls the File Transfer Dialog.

ALT-Y: Clears Transmit Window and sends TCLEAR to the TNC.

ALT-Z: Changes the Operating Mode.

SHIFT-INS: Pastes text from the ClipBoard into the TX window.

PgUP: Calls the Scroll Back Buffer.

HOME: Calls the QSO Log Dialog.

END: Calls the Mheard Dialog.

PRINT Screen: Saves incoming data to the printer.

F3: Calls the CONNECT Dialog.

F4: Issues a DISCONNEct command.

F6: Toggles the HF Packet LITE feature on/off.

^F6 : Issues a FREE memory inquiry.

F7: Toggles the MailDrop Monitor (MDMON) on/off.

Sh-F7: Toggles MAILDROP on/off.

F8: Toggles CONPERM on/off.

Up: Increases the Packet Channel.

Dn: Decreases the Packet Channel.

Button Descriptions:

 Toggles the RX window from the Display ALL mode to the Display individual CHannel mode. When the Mode is Display CHannel, the button changes to [image].

 Hold/Release transmit buffer. When pressed, the data you

type into the transmit buffer will be held until this button is released.

 Packet Connect.  Brings up the packet Connect dialog and

allows you to connect to other Packet stations.

 Packet Disconnect.  Initiates the packet Disconnect process

when you are through talking to the other station.

 Clears the transmit window and issues a TCLEAR, command to the TNC.

 Clears the receive window and the Scroll Back Buffer.

.

 Opens the File Transfer Dialog.

 Opens and Displays the Macro Dialog.  If clicked while a macro is executing, the Macro in progress will be terminated.

  ID Performs a Packet Identification of your station if HID is also checked.

 Displays the MailDrop Dialog.

If there is mail in the MailDrop for the SYSOP, the button will turn white (with 7/92 firmware or newer).

 Turns on the File Capture to begin saving incoming received text to disk. When a File capture is in progress the button is stays depressed. Click on the depressed button to stop the File Capture.

 File Capture hold/release button. When a File Capture is taking place, the button changes to [image]. Clicking on the button while it is green will temporarily pause the File Capture. The button then will change to [image]. Clicking on the button will change it back to green and the File Capture will continue. When the File Capture is terminated, the button returns back to gray.

 Saves incoming data so it can to be printed. When data is being saved, the button will change to [image]. Click on the button again to stop saving data and spool the data to the printer. Be sure to set the Printer font and point size before printing.

 Opens and Displays the QSO Log Dialog.

 Calls the MHEARD Dialog to show a list of the most recently heard packet stations.

 Makes a packet connection 'permanent' toggling the CONPERM command on/off.  The button is depressed  when a packet link is 'CONPERMed'.

 Enables/Disables sending received data to Log Windows. When data is  to be sent  to Log Windows, the button will change to [image]. Communications with Log Windows must first be started from the Tools Menu.

 Toggles the HF packet LITE feature on/off.  When LITE is ON, the button changes to [image].

 Toggles MAILDROP on/off.  When MAILDROP is on, your packet MailDrop is available to remote stations wishing to log on to your MailDrop.  The button will change to [image] when your MailDrop is available for others to use.

 Toggles the MailDrop Monitor feature  (MDMON) on/off. When MDMON is on, the button changes to [image].

Packet connects are initiated by pressing  [image] . PPWIN will then display the Connect Dialog. The dialog contains a List Box to hold the callsigns of stations you frequently connect to. To add a callsign to the list, type the callsign in the Edit Box and click on ADD. The call will be added to the list and saved to disk. To Establish a connect, either double click on a callsign in the List Box or type the callsign in the Edit Box and click on  OK or press Enter. To Delete a callsign from the list, click on the callsign to select it and press DELETE.

To establish connect through multiple NET/ROM or <The-Net> compatible packet nodes, separate the node callsigns with a semicolon. For example:

MLB;C ORL;C N4PZM

This example will allow you to connect to N4PZM using first the MLB then the ORL nodes. The connect Dialog will not return back to the operating screen until all connections have been made. If any of the connections fail, the Dialog will close. The Dialog will also show the progress of each connect in the path.

You can close the Connect Dialog and the connect process will stop after the connect in process completes (or fails).

PPWIN maintains a separate connect file for each TNC.


AMTOR Operation

Key Definitions:

ALT-A: Calls the MailDrop Dialog.

ALT-I: Sends the ID command to the TNC.

ALT-L:  Sends the LOCK (Ltrs) command to the TNC.

ALT-J: Toggles ARXTOR.

ALT-M: Calls the Macro Dialog.

ALT-N:  Sends the NUMS command to the TNC.

ALT-Q: Refreshes the windows.

ALT-R: Clears Receive window and Scroll Back Buffer.

ALT-S: Holds/Releases Transmit Buffer

ALT-U: Initiates a File Capture.

ALT-V: Toggles Radio ports on the DSP-1232 Only.

ALT-X: Calls the File Transfer Dialog.

ALT-Y: Clears Transmit window and sends TCLEAR to the TNC.

ALT-Z: Changes Operating Mode.

SHIFT-INS: Pastes text from the ClipBoard into the TX window.

PgUP: Calls the Scroll Back Buffer

HOME: Calls the QSO Log Dialog.

END:  Sends a '+?' if linked in ARQ.

PRINT Screen: Saves incoming data to the printer.

PgDn: Quick Call Exchange terminate by a +?.

^PgDN: Quick Call Exchange terminate by a ^D .

F3: Starts an FEC AMTOR transmission.

Sh-F3: Starts a SELFEC transmission.

F4: Starts ARQ AMTOR call to another station.

F6: Toggles RXREV on/off.

Sh-F6: Toggles TXREV on/off.

^F6 : Issues a FREE command check to the TNC.

F7: Toggles the MailDrop Monitor (MDMON) command.

Sh-F7: Toggles the TMAIL command on/off.

F8: Places the TNC in AMTOR Standby.

F9: Starts the AMTOR Listen (ALIST) mode.

Sh-F9: Grabs the ARQ link with the ACHG command.

 Button Descriptions:

 Hold/Release transmit buffer. The transmit buffer can hold

up to 1000 characters. PPWIN will beep of more than 1000 characters are entered while the buffer is being held.

  Toggles the ARXTOR command on and off.

  FEC. The Button allows you to make an FEC AMTOR

transmission such as for calling CQ or when in a "roundtable" AMTOR contact.  This button stays depressed when TNC is in FEC transmit mode.

  SELFEC. This button initiates a SELective FEC

transmission.  The Button stays depressed while transmitting.

  The ARQ Button opens the ARQ AMTOR Link dialog and

allows you to make an ARQ call to another station.  This button stays depressed when in ARQ mode.

  The ALIST button enters the AMTOR Listen mode

allowing other AMTOR stations to be monitored.  The Button stays depressed when in ALIST.

 This Button returns the TNC to AMTOR Standby receive

when pressed.

 This Button transfers to the PACTOR screen and enters the

PACTOR Listen mode when pressed.

  This button grabs the link from the ARQ AMTOR station

you are linked to with the ACHG command.  You must be linked with another AMTOR station to use this feature.

 Opens the File Transfer Dialog.  Only ASCII transfers are permitted in AMTOR.

 Clears the transmit window and issues a TCLEAR, command to the TNC.

 Clears the receive window and the Scroll Back Buffer.

 Displays the MailDrop Dialog window.

If there is mail in the Mail Drop for the SYSOP, the button will turn white.  (with 7/92 firmware or newer)

 Turns on the File Capture. When a File capture is in progress the button is stays depressed. Click on the depressed button to stop the File Capture.

 File Capture hold/release button. When a File Capture is taking place, the button changes to [image]. Clicking on the button while it is green will pause the File Capture. The button then will change to [image]. Clicking on the button will change it back to green and the File Capture will continue. When the File Capture is terminated, the button returns back to gray.

 Saves incoming data so it can to be printed. When data is being saved, the button will change to [image]. Click on the button again to stop saving data and spool the data to the printer. Be sure to set the Printer font and point size before printing.

 Opens and displays the QSO Log Dialog.

 Opens and displays the Macro Dialog. If clicked while a macro is executing, terminates the macro.

 LOCK Forces Letters should the printing suddenly shift to Figs due to a received error.

  Sends an ID command to the TNC.

  Toggles the RXREV command on/off.

  Toggles the TXREV command on/off.

 NUMS (BAUDOT and AMTOR only)  Forces Numbers should the printing suddenly shift to Letters due to a received error.

 This button toggles the WRU feature of the TNC on/off enabling other stations such as APLINK and AMTOR BBS stations to automatically determine your callsign.  See the AAB command for a description of what to enter.

 Enables/Disables sending received data to Log Windows. When data is  to be sent  to Log Windows, the button will change to [image]. Communications with Log Windows must first be started from the Tools Menu.

 Calls CQ by executing the CQ-AMTOR Macro.

 Executes the SK-AMTOR Macro.

 Execute the EQUIP-LIST Macro.

 Toggles TMAIL on/off. When TMAIL is on, the button changes to [image] and your AMTOR MailDrop is available to any other AMTOR station who links to you in ARQ.

 Toggles MDMON on/off. When MDMON is on, the button changes to [image] and you will monitor any other station linked to your AMTOR MailDrop.

ARQ links are initiated by pressing [image]. SELFEC transmissions are initiated by pressing [image] . PPWIN will then display the AMTOR Dialog. The dialog contains a List Box to hold the callsigns of stations you frequently link to.

To add a callsign to the list, type the callsign in the Edit Box and click on ADD. The will be added to the list and saved to disk. To Establish an ARQ link, either double click on a callsign in the List Box or type the callsign in the Edit Box and press OK or press Enter. To Delete a callsign from the list, click on the callsign to select it and press DELETE.


PACTOR Operation

Key Definitions:

ALT-A: Calls the MailDrop Dialog.

ALT-I: Sends the ID command to the TNC.

ALT-J: Toggles ARXTOR.

ALT-M: Calls the Macro Dialog.

ALT-Q: Refreshes the windows.

ALT-R: Clears Receive window and the Scroll Back Buffer.

ALT-S: Holds/Releases Transmit Buffer

ALT-U: Initiates a File Capture.

ALT-V: Toggles Radio ports on the DSP-1232 Only.

ALT-X: Calls the File Transfer Dialog.

ALT-Y: Clears Transmit window and sends TCLEAR to the TNC.

ALT-Z: Changes Operating Mode.

SHIFT-INS: Pastes text from the ClipBoard into the TX window.

PgUP: Calls the Scroll Back Buffer.

HOME: Calls the QSO Log Dialog.

END:  Sends a ^Z if connected to another PACTOR station.

PRINT Screen: Saves incoming data to the printer.

PgDn: Quick Call Exchange terminate by a ^Z.

^PgDN: Quick Call Exchange terminate by a ^D .

F3: Starts a PTSEND transmission.

F4: Starts PACTOR Connect with the PTCONN command.

^F6 : Issues a FREE command check to the TNC.

F7: Toggles the MailDrop Monitor (MDMON) command.

Sh-F7: Toggles the TMAIL command on/off.

F8: Places the TNC in PACTOR Standby.

F9: Starts the PACTOR Listen (PTLIST) mode.

Sh-F9: Grabs the PACTOR link with the ACHG command.

 Button Descriptions:

 Hold/Release transmit buffer. The transmit buffer can hold

up to 1000 characters. PPWIN will beep of more than 1000 characters are entered while the buffer is being held.

  Toggles the ARXTOR command on and off.

 When this button is pressed, the PACTOR Standby mode is

entered.

  PTLIST .  When this button is pressed, the PACTOR Listen

mode is entered.  This is the mode which monitors other PACTOR stations.

 When this button is pressed, the PACTOR Connect dialog

box appears letting you connect with other PACTOR stations using the PTCONN command.

 Press this button to start an FEC PACTOR transmission with the PTSEND command.  Use PTSEND for calling CQ (or simply press the CQ Macro) or for round table PACTOR conversations.

  This button grabs the link from the PACTOR station you

are connected to with the ACHG command.  You must be connected to another PACTOR station to use this command.

  ALIST. The Button automatically transfers you to the

AMTOR operating screen and enters the AMTOR Listen mode.

 When this button is pressed, the PT200 command is enabled letting PACTOR automatically switch to 200 baud  if conditions are good.  This will speed traffic flow when conditions permit.

 Opens the File Transfer Dialog.

 Clears the transmit window. If double clicked, issues a TCLEAR, command to the TNC.

 Clears the receive window and the Scroll Back Buffer.

 Displays the MailDrop Dialog window.

If there is mail in the Mail Drop for the SYSOP, the button will turn white (with 7/92 firmware or newer).

 Turns on the File Capture. When a File capture is in progress the button is stays depressed. Click on the depressed button to stop the File Capture.

 File Capture hold/release button. When a File Capture is taking place, the button changes to [image]. Clicking on the button while it is green will halt the File Capture. The button then will change to [image]. Clicking on the button will change it back to green and the File Capture will continue. When the File Capture is terminated, the button returns back to gray.

  Saves incoming data so it can  to be printed. When data is being saved, the button will change to [image]. Click on the button again to stop saving data and spool the data to the printer. You will be prompted by the Printer Setup Dialog and the Font Dialog to specify and set up your printer. Be sure to set the Printer font and point size before printing.

 Opens and Displays the QSO Log Dialog.

 Displays the Macro Dialog. If clicked while a macro is executing, terminates the macro.

 Enables/Disables sending received data to Log Windows. When data is  to be sent  to Log Windows, the button will change to [image]. Communications with Log Windows must first be started from the Tools Menu.

 Executes the CQ-PACTOR Macro.

 Executes the SK-PACTOR Macro.

 Execute the EQUIP-LIST Macro.

 Toggles TMAIL on/off.  When TMAIL is on, the button changes to [image] and your PACTOR MailDrop is available to any other PACTOR station who connects to you.

 Toggles MDMON on/off.  When MDMON is on, the button changes to [image] and you will monitor any other station connected to your PACTOR MailDrop.


BAUDOT Operation
BAUDOT/ASCII Operation

Key Definitions:

ALT-B: Changes the Baudot (RBAUD) or ASCII (ABAUD) radio baud rate.

ALT-I: Sends the ID command to the TNC.

ALT-L:  Sends the LOCK (Ltrs) command to the TNC.

ALT-M: Calls the Macro Dialog.

ALT-N:  Sends the NUMS command to the TNC.

ALT-Q: Refreshes the windows.

ALT-R: Clears Receive window and the Scroll Back Buffer.

ALT-S: Holds/Releases Transmit Buffer.

ALT-U: Initiates a File Capture.

ALT-V: Toggles Radio ports on the DSP-1232 Only.

ALT-X: Calls the File Transfer Dialog.

ALT-Y: Clears Transmit window and sends TCLEAR to the TNC.

ALT-Z: Changes Operating Mode.

SHIFT-INS: Pastes text from the ClipBoard into the TX window.

PgUP: Calls the Scroll Back Buffer.

HOME: Calls the QSO Log Dialog.

PRINT Screen: Saves incoming data to the printer.

PgDn: Quick Call Exchange terminate by a ^D.

^PgDN: Quick Call Exchange terminate by a ^D.

F3: Places the TNC into Baudot or ASCII XMIT.

F4: Places the TNC into Baudot or ASCII RCVE.

Sh-F4: Sends the LOCK (Ltrs) command to the TNC.

F6: Toggles receive reverse (RXREV) on/off.

Sh-F6: Toggles transmit reverse (TXREV) on/off.

^F6 : Issues a FREE command check to the TNC.

F9: Toggles the WIDESHFT command on/off.

 Button Descriptions:

 Hold/Release transmit buffer. The transmit buffer can hold

up to 1000 characters. PPWIN will beep of more than 1000 characters are entered while the buffer is being held.

  Places the TNC in Baudot or ASCII receive (RCVE) mode.

 Places the TNC in Baudot or ASCII transmit (XMIT) mode.

  Sends an ID command to the TNC.

 Displays the File Transfer Dialog.

 Clears the transmit window and issues a TCLEAR command to the TNC.

 Clears the receive window and the Scroll Back Buffer.

  Saves incoming data so it can  to be printed. When data is being saved, the button will change to [image]. Click on the button again to stop saving data and spool the data to the printer.  Be sure to set the Printer font and point size before printing.

 Turns on the File Capture. When a File capture is in progress the button is stays depressed. Click on the depressed button to stop the File Capture.

 File Capture hold/release button. When a File Capture is taking place, the button changes to [image]. Clicking on the button while it is green will pause the File Capture. The button then will change to [image]. Clicking on the button will change it back to green and the File Capture will continue. When the File Capture is terminated, the button returns back to gray.

 NUMS (BAUDOT and AMTOR only)  Forces Numbers should the printing suddenly shift to Letters due to a received error.

 LOCK Forces Letters should the printing suddenly shift to Figs due to a received error.

 Displays the QSO Log Dialog.

 Opens and Displays the Macro Dialog. If clicked while a macro is executing, terminates the macro.

  Toggles the RXREV command on/off.

  Toggles the TXREV command on/off.

  Toggles the WIDESHFT command on/off.

 This button toggles the WRU feature of the TNC on/off enabling other stations to automatically determine your callsign.  See the AAB command for a description of what to enter.

 Enables/Disables sending received data to Log Windows. When data is  to be sent  to Log Windows, the button will change to [image]. Communications with Log Windows must first be started from the Tools Menu.

 Executes the CQ-BAUDOT or CQ-ASCII Macro.

 Executes the SK-BAUDOT or SK-ASCII Macro.

 Execute the EQUIP-LIST Macro.


Dumb Terminal Operation

Key Definitions:

SHIFT-INS: Pastes text from the ClipBoard into the TX window.

HOME: Calls the QSO Log Dialog.

END: +?

PRINT Screen: Saves incoming data to the printer.

 Button Descriptions:

 Clears the transmit window and issues a TCLEAR command to the TNC.

 Turns on the File Capture. When a File capture is in progress the button is stays depressed. Click on the depressed button to stop the File Capture.

 File Capture hold/release button. When a File Capture is taking place, the button changes to [image]. Clicking on the button while it is green will pause the File Capture. The button then will change to [image]. Clicking on the button will change it back to green and the File Capture will continue. When the File Capture is terminated, the button returns back to gray.

 Opens and Displays the Macro Dialog. If clicked while a macro is executing, terminates the macro.

  Saves incoming data so it can  to be printed. When data is being saved, the button will change to [image]. Click on the button again to stop saving data and spool the data to the printer.  Be sure to set the Printer font and point size before printing.

 Opens and Displays the QSO Log Dialog.

 Opens and Displays the File Transfer Dialog.

 Pastes the contents (up to 1024 characters) from the ClipBoard to the transmit window (in the form of a Macro).


Signal Analysis Operation

The Signal Identification and Analysis Mode (SIAM) allows a wide variety of digital signals to be automatically analyzed so they can be copied by your multimode TNC. The TNC will listen to a signal for a few seconds and the display the type of signal and its speed. You then can decide whether or not to copy the signal.

Tuning in the FSK signal properly is critical to successful SIAM operation. SIAM can only decode a signal  properly if it is tuned correctly.

o    Make sure your transceiver is either in LSB or FSK depending on your TNC /radio setup.

o   Turn any IF-shift and Pass band Tuning controls to the center or OFF position.

o  Tune you receiver carefully across the band looking for the distinctive 2 tone sound of an FSK signal.

o  The received signal is tuned properly when the tuning indicator is spread out and looks something like [image].

o  If you are using a PK-232MBX or PK-900 adjust the THRESHOLD control so that the DCD indicator lights when properly tuned to the RTTY station.  If you are using a DSP data controller, make sure the volume from the receiver is high enough light the DCD LED.

After about 15 seconds, your TNC should respond with the mode, baud rate, the state of RXREV and the % confidence the signal is what the TNC thinks it is. For example:

0.47	50 Baud,   BAUDOT,   RXREV OFF

When you click on the OK and a valid mode has been determined by the TNC, PPWIN will set the TNC to the proper operating mode and adjust RXREV and the baud rate if necessary.

 Clears the receive window and the Scroll Back Buffer.

  Toggles the WIDESHFT command on/off.

PPWIN also allow you to change the values of CODE and BITINV.  If you have a PK-900 or DSP data controller the QSIGNAL and QWIDE commands can be set as well.  Click on the appropriate control to change the parameter.

Other parameters that affect the Signal Identification mode can be found in the Signal Parameters help topic.


MORSE Operation

Key Definitions:

ALT-I: Sends the ID command to the TNC.

ALT-L: Sends the Speed LOCK command to the TNC.

ALT-M: Calls the Macro Dialog.

ALT-Q: Refreshes the windows.

ALT-R: Clears Receive window and the Scroll Back Buffer.

ALT-S: Holds/Releases Transmit Buffer

ALT-U: Initiates a File Capture.

ALT-V: Toggles Radio ports on the DSP-1232 Only.

ALT-X: Calls the File Transfer Dialog.

ALT-Y: Clears Transmit window and sends TCLEAR to the TNC.

ALT-Z: Change Operating Mode.

SHIFT-INS: Pastes text from the ClipBoard into the TX window.

PgUP: Calls the Scroll Back Buffer

HOME: Calls the QSO Log Dialog.

PRINT Screen: Saves incoming data to the printer.

PgDn: Quick Call Exchange terminate by a ^D.

^PgDN: Quick Call Exchange terminate by a ^D .

F3: Places the TNC into Morse XMIT.

F4: Places the TNC into Morse RCVE.

Sh-F4: Sends the Speed LOCK command to the TNC.

 Button Descriptions:

 Hold/Release transmit buffer. The transmit buffer can hold up to 1000 characters. PPWIN will beep of more than 1000 characters are entered while the buffer is being held.

  Places the TNC in Morse receive (RCVE) mode.

 Places the TNC in Morse transmit (XMIT) mode.

 Displays the File Transfer Dialog.

 Clears the transmit window and issues a TCLEAR command to the TNC.

 Clears the receive window and the Scroll Back Buffer.

  Saves incoming data so it can  to be printed. When data is being saved, the button will change to [image]. Click on the button again to stop saving data and spool the data to the printer.  Be sure to set the Printer font and point size before printing.

 Turns on the File Capture. When a File capture is in progress the button is stays depressed. Click on the depressed button to stop the File Capture.

 File Capture hold/release button. When a File Capture is taking place, the button changes to [image]. Clicking on the button while it is green will pause the File Capture. The button then will change to [image]. Clicking on the button will change it back to green and the File Capture will continue. When the File Capture is terminated, the button returns back to gray.

 Sends the Morse Speed LOCK command to the

TNC.

 Displays the QSO Log Dialog.

 Opens and Displays the Macro Dialog. If clicked while a macro is executing, terminates the macro.

 Enables/Disables sending received data to Log Windows. When data is  to be sent  to Log Windows, the button will change to [image]. Communications with Log Windows must first be started from the Tools Menu.

 Executes the CQ-MORSE Macro.

 Executes the SK-MORSE  Macro.

 Execute the EQUIP-LIST Macro.

PPWIN also allow you to change the values of your transmitted Morse speed in Words per minute (MSPEED) and the dot-dash ratio with the MWEIGHT command. Click on the appropriate up/down control to change the parameter.  Other parameters that affect Morse operation are described in the Baudot/ASCII/Morse Parameters help topic.


Packet Monitor Window

Key Definitions:

ALT-Q: Refreshes the windows.

ALT-R: Clears Receive Window and Scroll Back Buffer.

ALT-U: Initiates a File Capture.

PgUP: Calls the Scroll Back Buffer.

HOME: Calls the QSO Log Dialog.

END: Calls the Mheard Dialog.

PRINT Screen: Saves incoming data to the printer.

F3:Toggles the Port 1 button for TNC1.

F4: Toggles the Port 1 button for TNC 1.

F5: Toggles the Port 1 button for TNC 2.

F6: Toggles the Port 2 button for TNC 2.

Button Descriptions:

 Enables displaying unproto data from Port 1. Then button will change to [image] when displaying of unproto packets is enabled. The [image] button works similiarily.  The label to the right of these buttons denotes which TNC is affected.

 Clears the receive window and the Scroll Back Buffer.

 Turns on the File Capture to begin saving incoming received text to disk. When a File capture is in progress the button is stays depressed. Click on the depressed button to stop the File Capture.

 File Capture hold/release button. When a File Capture is taking place, the button changes to [image]. Clicking on the button while it is green will temporarily pause the File Capture. The button then will change to [image]. Clicking on the button will change it back to green and the File Capture will continue. When the File Capture is terminated, the button returns back to gray.

 Saves incoming data so it can to be printed. When data is being saved, the button will change to [image]. Click on the button again to stop saving data and spool the data to the printer. Be sure to set the Printer font and point size before printing.

In order for the Packet Monitor Window to display data, The TNC and port must be in Packet mode. This window will not display nonpacket data nor will it display data which directed towards a specific channel; only unproto data will be displayed.

The Packet Monitor Window receives its data from the respective TNC window, so if there are no TNC windows open, data is not being received from the TNC and nothing will be displayed in the monitor window.

Data from a tnc will be displayed in the same color same Monitor Channel for that tnc. For example, data from TNC 2 will be displayed in the same color as the Monitor channel for TNC 2.

While connected, MCON should be set to 4 or higher to be able to display unproto packets in the monitor window.


PPWIN INI File
PPWIN.INI Parameters

PCPakratt For Windows creates a .INI file during the it's initial installation. Normally the user will not need to made changes to this file. The exception is when using higher screen resolutions (1024x768 or higher) with some graphics boards. The higher screen resolutions can cause the Status Dialog not to be sized correctly, thus cutting off the bottom of the dialog and some of the text windows. (This seems to be particularly necessary for folks running OS/2 in 1024x768 mode with the 32 bit S3 video drivers). The problem is caused by differences in the report size of the font being used for the Status window.

PPWIN allows for a variable to be specified in the .INI to increase the size of the Status Window so all text windows in the Dialog can be seen. This entry will have to be added manually. The format of this variable is:

[STATUS_DLG]

OFFSET=##

Where ## is the number of pixels to add to the height of the

status dialog.

The other parameters in the .INI control the default directory for PPWIN, the state of the LogWindows connection, information regarding the monitor window as well as the size and state of the Main and child windows. These keys should not be changed by the user.


Sending MailDrop Messages

To send a message, first enter the title of the message in the Title Edit Box. Next enter the callsign of the station to receive the message (including the @ BBS if applicable) in the Call Edit Box.

 Now enter the message text in the Message edit Box at the bottom of the window as shown. When the message is ready to send, click on the Send  Button. The Clear Button clears the title, callsign and Message edit Boxes.

Text can be pasted from the clipboard to any of the edit boxes by pressing CTRL-INS. To place a carriage return in to your message, type CTRL-ENTER.

To send an ASCII text  file, click on File button.  The File Dialog will appear and prompt for a text file. The contents of the file will be entered in to the message Edit Box.  Then press Send to send the message to the TNC. Remember always to enter a title and a destination callsign before pressing Send otherwise PC-Pakratt will not know whom to send the message to.

The Font button allows you to change the font used in the MailDrop dialog. The default is a Terminal font. The Terminal font supports all 256 possible characters from the IBM PC characters. Other fonts, such as Arial, only support a limit set of characters.

To close the Mail Drop Send Dialog, click on Quit or press ESC.


What's New for 2.0
What's New For PCPakratt For Windows 2.0

The following comprises the list of changes for Version 2.0. Many of these changes were made by the request of users of this program.

The TNC is now polled more frequently for incoming data which speeds up the data reception from the TNC.

Text that is typed is now sent more quickly to the TNC. This primarily effects Morse and BAUDOT operators who use the program for contesting. Macro speeds are significantly improved.

The key ALT-K  sends the call exchange without ^D or +?.

The call exchange (PGDN and CTRL-PGDN) now appends a 'K' before the ^D, +? or ^Z.

The width of MHEARD dialog was widened to accommodate the new MHEARD format (Dec 1993 firmware release).

The MailDrop dialogs have been revised to make them more user friendly. The MailDrop window can also be sized horizontally.  See also Mail Drop Operation

The Call sign field in Log now holds 10 chars. Edit box size did not change, but will scroll to allow the full 10 chars. See also QSO Log.

The Rx & Tx buttons in Status Window were juxtaposed.

XMITOK was added to the PACTOR Parameters Dialog

Eliminated the parameter CUSTOM from all Parameter Dialogs. UBIT roughly performs the same function as CUSTOM.

Support for the Dec 1993 Firmware release was added.

PPWIN can now process the BS when in ASCII mode.

New buttons for HELP & CLOSE in Scrollback Status Dialog were created

so things fit a little nicer in VGA resolution. New customized buttons are also seen on the Connect & Macro Dialogs.

The program now stores the window state in PPWIN.INI file for the TNC and Main windows. This allows the program to restore the windows (i.e., minimized, maximized or normal) when PcPakratt For Windows is again run.

PPWIN supports AEAs new PK-12 and PK-96 TNCs.

The opening dialog is now properly re-sized so things will look nicer with higher resolution displays when using large fonts.

Added support for a new entry to the PPWIN.INI file. Format is:

[STATUS_DLG]

OFFSET=##

where ## is the number of pixels to add to the height of the status dialog. This seems to be necessary when running OS/2 in 1024x768 mode with 32 bit S3 video drivers. This entry will have to be added manually for those folks with that problem.

IWhen the edit box is cleared for CTEXT, BTEXT & UNPROTO using an empty string, PPWIN now traps the empty string replaces it with an "%" to tell the TNC to clear the parameter.

In the previous version messages greater than 8200 bytes were truncated. To accomodate larger messages,the buffer size has been increased to 64K.

A new operating mode, called Hi Speed Pkt, has been added. The default parameters are similar to VHF Packet but the modems are set to 9600. Hi Speed Pkt is only available on DSP products, PK-96 and Port 2 of the PK900.

PPWIN now communicates with LogWindows. PPWIN acts as a data engine to send data received from the TNC to LogWindows. LogWindow can also send data to PPWINs transmit window.

The processing of ^G characters can be controlled, the beeping can be turned off/on for each of the TNC and Port windows.

PPWIN now can display most ANSI Escape codes. The codes supported are:

ESC[2J......Clear Screen

ESC[#m......Change Screen Attributes where x is:

0... Reset Attributes back to defaults

1... Foreground colours are bold

7... Foreground and background colours are reversed

30.. Black Foreground

31.. Red Foreground

32.. Green Foreground

33.. Yellow Foreground

34.. Blue Foreground

35.. Magenta Foreground

36.. Cyan Foreground

37.. White Foreground

40.. Black Background

41.. Red Background

42.. Green Background

43.. Yellow Background

44.. Blue Background

45.. Magenta Background

46.. Cyan Background

47.. White Background

ESC[#A.....Move Cursor up # lines, default is 1

ESC[#B.....Move Cursor down # lines, default is 1

ESC[#C.....Move Cursor to the right # characters, default is 1

ESC[#D.....Move Cursor to the left # characters, default is 1

ESC[#;#H..Move Cursor to specified X,Y position (Note origin is 1,1)

ESC[k........Erase Line

ESC[s........Save Cursor position

ESC[u........Restore Cursor position

ESC sequences can be typed into the transmit window, sent in a macro or transmitted in a file.

ANSI graphics files should end with an ESC[0m sequence to reset the window colors back to their default values.

PcPakratt For Windows now has a Packet Monitor Window to display unproto packets.


LogWindows Interface

PcPakratt For Windows provides a TNC interface for LogWindows. Data being received or echoed by the TNC can be sent to LogWindows. Likewise data typed in LogWindows transmit window canbe send to PcPakratts transmit window (in the form of a macro). PcPakratt acts as a data engine for LogWindows. All PcPakratt functions are still enabled while communicating with LogWindows.  LogWindows 2.0 or greater is required.

To allow all this to happen, PcPakratt must first become aware that LogWindows is running. To do this, select the Sync With LogWindows menu item from the Tools Menu. If LogWindows is not running, PcPakratt will report an error.

If LogWindow is running and the two programs have synced. the [image] button found in the TNC Status Dialogs will change to [image]. To allow a particular TNC window to communication with LogWindows, click on the button. The button will change to [image]. To stop communications with LogWindows, click on the button again so it is no longer depressed.

Only one TNC window may communication with LogWindows at a time .By clicking on the LW button in a different TNC window will enable that window to communicate with LogWindows and stop the previous window from  communicating with LogWindows.

PcPakratt for Windows automatically saves which window last had talked with LogWindows.

PcPakratt for Windows periodically polls LogWindows to verify it is there. If LogWindows is terminated, PcPakratt will sense this and stopping polling and sending data to LogWindows. The LW buttons will also become grayed.

When PcPakratt terminates, it also informs LogWindows so it will know not to try to send any more data to PPWIN. The link with LogWindows can also be terminated from the Tools Menu.

When operating Packet, the state of the [image] button effects the data sent to Log Widnows. When the button is up, all data is sent to LogWindows. When the button is depressed, [image], only data sent to the current channel (as shown in the Status Dialog) will be echoed to LogWindows.

Refer to your LogWindows operation manual for more information on LogWindows operation.


ANSI Graphics
ANSI Graphics With PcPakratt For Windows

Because PcPakratt For Windows is a true windows program and ANSI graphics were designed for a DOS text screen there are some special considerations for designing ANSI graphics which will be send to others using PcPakratt For Windows. There are also a few considerations when receiving graphics..

For Best Results...

The receive ANSI graphics, 8BITCONV must be set on ON and MFILTER must be set to 0. The program and receiving window should maximized to reduce many of the limitation described later on in this section.

For the best results, all lines should end with a <CR>. PcPakratt For Windows displays text in terms of lines and sizes lines according to the width of the window. Control sequences still can be used to set the position of text on a line however, this may cause the graphics to appear over text that is received after the graphics if the window is repainted. Graphics which do not have a <CR> and use only escape sequences to set the text position may not be displayed properly if the receiving window is not large enough for the graphic. Using the scroll back buffer to review a graphic can have some interesting effects if the graphic does not contain any <CR> at the end of each line. However, the scroll back buffer can be refreshed using the ALT-Q key.

Graphics should only be large enough to display the message. Graphics which are made to fit in a standard 80x25 text window may not fit on the receiving stations display. It also takes much more time to send  a graphic like this since they are typically padded with blanks. In Pactor, characters which have an ASCII value greater than 127 (like the line drawing character set) can not be compressed. These characters will slow down the effected baud rate of the transmission.

Saving ANSI Graphics Sequences

Graphics which are being reviewed can be saved to a file by using the file capture function of the program. Graphics can also be copied in to the clipboard from the scroll back buffer. Graphics then can be pasted in to the transmit window, a macro or a mail message.

Limitations

The background color of the receive window is determined by the default color at the time of display. Normally the color is set by the Windows Control Panel -- window color. However, an ANSI graphic may change the background color of the display. If the receive window is forced to repaint (because the receive was hidden by another window, the user pressed ALT-Q & etc.), the window background will be set to the current color of the background. This may cause areas of the graphics to be a different color than what was intended by the author.

The following scenios are possible when receiving an ANSI graphics picture using PcPakratt For Windows.

A) ANSI Graphics which do not contain <CR> at the end of each line

and/or use the A, B, H or f sequence to control the Y position.

1) If the receive window height is more than high enough to display a graphic:

a) The graphic will be displayed normally and the text that follows will be displayed normally.

b) If the window scrolls, the graphics will scroll off the screen.

c) If the window is re-painted, the last 'X' lines will not be displayed. X' varies with the size of the screen. Characters incoming after that will be displayed.

d) The scroll back buffer will scroll up correctly. When scrolling down, the entire graphic may not be displayed correctly unless the entire window is  forced to be repainted.

e) When returning to the receive window after reviewing the scroll bacl buffer,  if the graphics is still visible on the screen, the last X lines will not be displayed. Incoming text will be displayed.

f) If the receive window is repainted, the current default background color will be used. Normally this color is white. If repainting occurs while a graphic is being painted, the background color being used at the time will be used.

2) If the received graphic's height is greater than the  receive window height:

a) The last lines of the graphic will overwrite the last line in the window.

b) Incoming text will be put at the end of the last line.

c) If the window is re-painted, the graphic will be repainted, text after the graphic will not be displayed. Also the next incoming line may not be displayed. Further lines will be displayed.

d) Once enough lines have been received so no part of the graphic is displayed, the receive window will behave normally.

e) If the receive window is repainted, the current default background color will be used. Normally this color is white. If repainting occurs while a graphics is being painted, the background color being used at the time will be used.

B) ANSI Graphics which do contain <CR> at the end of the line and do not use the H or f sequence to control the Y position.

1) Text & graphics will be displayed normally (if the width of the window is wide enough to properly display the line otherwise the line will wrap like text).

2) Scroll back buffer will behave normally

3) If the receive window is repainted, the current default background color will be used. Normally this color is white. If repainting occurs while a graphics is being painted, the background color being used at the time will be used.

C) Text without graphics will display normally.

D) Misc.

1) The background color is set by the ANSI escape sequence. If an ESC[2J sequence is sent, the screen is cleared using the current background color.

2) Clicking the mouse on the receive window while in the scroll back mode forces a paint incase  text was hilited or unhilited.

3) A backspace may cause the screen to be repainted if the BS forces the current text position to be on a different line.

4) A window overlapping the receive window will cause the receive window to repaint the part of the window covered. The window is repaint from the top of the invalidated region  to the bottom of the receive window.

5) The receive window is displayed in terms of lines. Lines are set by either a <CR> or  when the X position exceeds the width of the window. The lines are re-adjusted  when the window is sized.

6) Scrolling causes a portion of the window to be invalidated forcing the receive window to repaint part of the window. When scrolling up, the last line on the receive window is repainted, when scrolling down, the top line is invalidated.


3Rdparty
  3Rdparty  ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet/AMTOR/PACTOR MailDrop

  Host: 3R

________________________________________________________________________

ON    -   The MailDrop will handle third party traffic.

OFF  -   The MailDrop will only handle mail to or from MYCALL or MYMAIL.

________________________________________________________________________

If 3RDPARTY is ON, then remote AMTOR, PACTOR and Packet MailDrop users may leave messages for any station.


  5Bit

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Command

  Host: 5B

________________________________________________________________________

5BIT is an immediate command allowing the user to store 5-bit Baudot transmissions received (Radio Port 1 of dual port TNCs) then write a program to decrypt codes that involve bit inversion or transposition. In 5BIT, a constant of $40 (64 decimal) is added to each received 5-bit character to make it a printable ASCII character in the range of $40-5F.  All characters are treated this way, including CR, LF, LTRS and FIGS.

When the user enters 5BIT, the TNC displays "OPMODE now BAUDOT".  This is not strictly true; however, the Baudot mode will be displayed on port 1 of the PK-900's or DSP's LCD STATUS display and the Baudot LED will be lit on the PK-232MBX.

RXREV, RBAUD and the MODEM number must be set properly for the monitored transmission.  SIGNAL is helpful in determining whether a transmission is 5-bit and the settings for RBAUD and RXREV, but pressing the  OK Button after SIGNAL selects BAUDOT, not 5BIT.

Do not change modes directly between BAUDOT, 5BIT and 6BIT. Go through some other mode first, such as Packet.  These commands do not function in 5BIT:

BITINV, CCITT, CODE, MARSDISP, TRACE, USOS, WRU and XMIT.


  6Bit

 Immediate Command

  Mode: Command

  Host: 6B

________________________________________________________________________

Same as 5BIT, except that the unit receives a 6-bit code and adds a constant of $30 (48 decimal) to yield a range of $30-6F.  RXREV, RBAUD and WIDESHFT must be set correctly.  SIGNAL is helpful in determining whether a transmission is 6-bit and the settings for RBAUD and RXREV, but OK will not automatically select 6BIT.

When the user enters 6BIT, the TNC displays "OPMODE now BAUDOT".  This is not strictly true; however, the Baudot mode will be displayed on port 1 of the PK-900's or DSP's  LCD STATUS display and the Baudot LED will be lit on the PK-232MBX.

Do not change modes directly between BAUDOT, 5BIT and 6BIT  Go through some other mode first, such as Packet.  These commands do not function in 6BIT:

BITINV, CCITT, CODE, MARSDISP, TRACE, USOS, WRU, or XMIT.


8Bitconv
  8Bitconv  ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet, PACTOR and ASCII

  Host: 8B

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    The high-order bit IS NOT stripped in Converse Mode.

OFF -    The high-order bit IS stripped in Converse Mode.

________________________________________________________________________

8BITCONV permits packet, PACTOR and ASCII transmission of 8-bit data in Converse Mode. When 8BITCONV is OFF (default), the high-order bit (bit seven) of characters received from the terminal is set to 0 before the characters are transmitted.

Many users will want to turn this ON in PACTOR and Packet operation as it is necessary to receive the IBM screen graphics used in PACTOR pictures.


AAb
AAb  text

  Default: empty

  Mode: Baudot, ASCII, AMTOR, PACTOR

  Host: AU

________________________________________________________________________

text   -   Any combination of characters up to a maximum of 24 characters.

________________________________________________________________________

Use the AAB command to enter an acknowledgment text for Baudot, ASCII,  AMTOR and PACTOR. AAB sends automatic confirmation in Baudot, ASCII, AMTOR and PACTOR in response to a distant station's WRU? request. Set WRU ON to activate Auto-Answerback in ASCII and Baudot. In AMTOR and PACTOR, UserBIT 9 (UBIT 9) controls the Auto-Answerback feature.

Type "AAB (24-character text)" to store your AnswerBack in memory.


ABaud
ABaud  "n"

  Default: 110 bauds

  Mode: ASCII

  Host: AB

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -   Specifies the ASCII data rate or signaling speed in bauds from your TNC to your radio.

________________________________________________________________________

ABAUD sets the radio ("on-air") baud rate only in the ASCII operating mode (Radio Port 1 of dual port TNCs). This value has no relationship to your computer or terminal program's baud rate. The available "n" ASCII data rates in bauds are:

45, 50, 57, 75, 100, 110, 150, 200, 300, 400, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 and 9600

In PC-Pakratt for Windows, this value is set on the tool bar in the ASCII operating window.  The value entered in this window is saved with the other operating parameters when "Save Parameters" is chosen from the File menu.

Note that the internal modem in the TNC is limited to 1200 baud.  With an external modem, ASCII data rates to 9600 baud are supported.


AChg

 Immediate Command

  Mode: AMTOR and PACTOR

  Host: AG

________________________________________________________________________

ACHG is an immediate command used in AMTOR and PACTOR by the receiving station to interrupt the sending station's transmissions. As the receiving station, you usually rely on the distant station, your partner in the ARQ "handshake", to send the "+?" (<Ctrl-Z> in PACTOR) command to do the changeover. However, in ARQ AMTOR (Mode A) and PTCONN (Connected) PACTOR, you can use the ACHG command to "break in" on the sending station's transmission.

ACHG is accessed from the tool bar in either AMTOR or PACTOR by pressing the [image] button.  Use the ACHG command only when it is needed.


ACKprior
ACKprior  ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: AN

________________________________________________________________________

ON    -   Priority Acknowledgment is enabled.

OFF  -   This feature is disabled.

________________________________________________________________________

This command implements the Priority Acknowledge scheme described by Eric Gustafson (N7CL), which proposes to improve multiple access packet performance on HF and VHF simplex channels with hidden terminals. When a busy channel clears, the acknowledgments are sent immediately, while data and poll bits are held off long enough to prevent collisions with the ACKs.  By giving priority to data ACKs, fewer ACKs will collide with other station's data, reducing retries. Digipeated frames are sent immediately. RAWHDLC and KISS force ACKPRIOR off. These are the defaults for a P-persistence system with NO Priority Acknowledgment:

ACKPRIOR OFF,  PPERSIST ON,   PERSIST  63,  SLOTTIME 30,

RESPTIME 0,    MAXFRAME 4,    FRACK    5

The following are the recommended command settings for Priority Acknowledge:

1200 baud VHF packet	300 baud HF packet

  ACKPRIOR	ON	ACKPRIOR	ON

  PPERSIST	ON	PPERSIST	ON

  PERSIST  	84	PERSIST	84

  SLOTTIME  	30	SLOTTIME	8

  RESPTIME	0	RESPTIME	0

  MAXFRAME	1 - 7	MAXFRAME	1

  FRACK	8	FRACK	15

  HBAUD	1200	HBAUD	300

  VHF	ON (or TONE 3)	VHF	OFF (or TONE 0)

  DWAIT 	doesn't matter	DWAIT	doesn't matter

Stations using neither the Priority Acknowledge nor the P-persistence schemes should set DWAIT 73 for 1200 baud and DWAIT 76 for 300 baud work. Stations using P-persistence but not Priority Acknowledge should set PERSIST and SLOTTIME to the same values that ACKPRIOR stations are using.

AEA and TAPR use some different command names to handle P-persistence. The following table should help with the AEA/TAPR command differences:

TAPR	MFJ	AEA

SLOTS	SLOTMASK	PERSIST	Remarks

 1       	$00      	255	Disables slotting

 2      	$01      	127

 3                 	84

 4       	$03       	63	Default setting

 6                 	42

 8       	$07       	31	Very busy channel

12                 	20

16       	$0F       	15	Extremely busy channel

64       	$3F        	3

AEA products calculate the TAPR ACKTIME value based on the setting of HBAUD.  The TAPR DEADTIME command is analogous to the AEA SLOTTIME command.


ACRDisp
ACRDisp   "n"

  Default: 0

  Mode: ALL

  Host: AA

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -   0 to 255 specifies the screen width, in columns or

characters.  0 (zero) disables this function.

________________________________________________________________________

The numerical value "n" sets the terminal output format for your needs. Your TNC sends a <CR><LF> sequence to your computer or terminal at the end of a line in the Command and Converse Modes when "n" characters have been printed. Most computers and terminals do this automatically so ACRDISP defaults to 0.

When the TNC is in the MORSE mode, received data will be broken up on word boundaries if possible. At a column of 12 less than the ACRDISP value, the TNC starts looking for spaces in the received data. The first space received after this column forces the TNC to generate a carriage return. If ACRDISP is 0 (default), this occurs at column 60. If there are no spaces at or after this column then a carriage return occurs at ACRDISP.

PPWIN sets ACRDISP to 0. ACRDISP can only be set in the Dumb Terminal Mode and is reset to 0 when leaving the Dumb Terminal Mode by PPWIN.


ACRPack
ACRPack  ON|OFF

 Default: ON

 Mode: Packet

 Host: AK

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    The send-packet character IS added to packets sent in Converse Mode.

OFF -    The send-packet character is NOT added to packets.

________________________________________________________________________

When ACRPACK is ON (default), all packets sent in Converse Mode include the SEND-PACket character (normally <CR>) as the last character of the packet.

When ACRPACK is OFF, the send-packet character is interpreted as a command, and is not included in the packet or echoed to the terminal. ACRPACK ON and SENDPAC $0D produce a natural conversational mode.


ACRRtty
  ACRRtty  "n"

  Default: 71 (69 in AMTOR)

  Mode: Baudot/ASCII RTTY, AMTOR and PACTOR

  Host: AT

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -     0 - 255 specifies the number of characters on a line before a carriage return <CR> is automatically inserted in your transmitted text. Zero (0) disables the function.

________________________________________________________________________

When sending Baudot or ASCII RTTY and PACTOR, the ACRRTTY feature automatically sends a carriage return at the first space following the "n'th" character or column.

Use this option when you are sending and don't want to be bothered by watching the screen or worrying about line length.  You should NOT use this option when re-transmitting text received from another station; for example, ARRL Bulletins.

ACRRTTY is used in AMTOR, except that AMTOR is limited by international telex practices to a maximum of 69 characters per line.  If ACRRTTY is set to 71, in AMTOR the automatic carriage return function operates after 69 characters.


ADelay
  ADelay  "n"

  Default: 4 (40 msec.)

  Mode: AMTOR and PACTOR

  Host: AD

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    1 to 9 specifies transmitter key-up delay in 10-millisecond intervals.

________________________________________________________________________

ADELAY is the length of time in tens of milliseconds between the time when the TNC activates the transmitter's PTT line and the ARQ AMTOR or Connected PACTOR data begins to flow.  The ADELAY command allows you to adjust a variable delay, from 10 to 90 milliseconds to handle the PTT (Push-to-Talk) delay of different transmitters.

In most cases, the default value of 4 (40 milliseconds) is adequate for the majority of the popular HF transmitters. If the signal strength is good and you observe periodic errors caused by loss of phasing (shown by re-phase cycles in the middle of an ARQ contact) during contacts, it may be necessary to adjust the ADELAY value.

o    Be sure that errors and re-phasing effects are not caused by the

distant station before changing your ADELAY.

o    If changing your ADELAY values does not improve link performance,

reinstall your original value and ask the other station to try changing his ADELAY.

Because the AMTOR ARQ mode allows 170 milliseconds for the signal to travel to the distant station and return, increasing ADELAY will reduce the maximum working distance. The maximum theoretical range of an ARQ contact is limited to about 25,500 kilometers. Using some of that time as transmit delay leaves less time for signal propagation. Thus the maximum distance available is reduced.  In PACTOR the maximum distance is somewhat longer.  See the PTCONN command for more information on PACTOR connects.

Regardless of the setting of ADELAY, ARQ (Mode A) AMTOR may not work very well over very short distances, e.g., one or two miles. However, in very short distance work, ARQ should not be necessary to achieve error-free copy and FEC AMTOR or PTSEND PACTOR may be used.


AFilter
AFilter  ON|OFF

   Default: OFF

   Mode: ALL

   Host: AZ

________________________________________________________________________

ON  -    The ASCII characters specified in the MFILTER are filtered out and never sent to the terminal or computer.

OFF -   Characters in MFILTER list are only filtered from monitored packets.

________________________________________________________________________

Some terminals and computers use special characters to clear the screen or perform other "special" functions.  Placing these characters in the MFILTER list, and turning AFILTER ON will keep the TNC from sending them.

Exception: When ECHO is ON, and the terminal or computer sends a filtered character, the TNC will echo it back to the terminal or computer. (NOTE: PPWIN automatically sets ECHO on).

AFILTER works regardless of mode, or CONNECT / CONVERSE/ TRANSPARENT status. One must be careful to leave AFILTER OFF during Binary file transfers.

PPWIN turns AFILTER OFF during Binary File Transfers. Do not turn AFILTER ON during a file transfer.


ALFDisp
ALFDisp  ON|OFF

  Default: ON

  Mode: All

  Host: AI

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   A line feed character <LF> IS sent to the terminal after each <CR>.

OFF -   A <LF> is NOT sent to the terminal after each <CR>.

________________________________________________________________________

ALFDISP controls the display of carriage return characters received, as well as the echoing of those that are typed in.

When ALFDISP is ON (default), your TNC adds a line feed <LF> to each carriage return <CR> received, if needed.  If a line feed was received either immediately before or after a carriage return, ALFDISP will not add another line feed. Use the TNC's sign-on message to determine how carriage returns are being displayed.  ALFDISP affects your display; it does not affect transmitted data.

Set ALFDISP ON if the TNC 's sign-on message lines are typed over each other. Set ALFDISP OFF if the TNC's sign-on message is double spaced. ALFDISP is set correctly if the TNC's sign-on message is single spaced.

Note: PPWIN sets ALFDISP to OFF. ALFDISP can be changed from the Dumb Terminal Mode. PPWIN will set ALFDISP when leaving the Dumb Terminal Mode.


ALFPack
ALFPack  ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: AP

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    A <LF> character IS added after each <CR> sent in outgoing packets.

OFF -    A <LF> is NOT added to outgoing packets (default).

________________________________________________________________________

ALFPACK is similar to ALFDISP, except that the <LF> characters are added to outgoing (transmitted) packets, rather than to text displayed locally.

o    If the person you are talking to reports overprinting of packets from

your station, set ALFPACK ON. ALFPACK is disabled in Transparent Mode.


ALFRtty
 ALFRtty  ON|OFF

 Default: ON

 Mode: Baudot/ASCII RTTY

 Host: AR

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    A line feed character <LF> IS sent after each carriage return <CR>.

OFF -    A <LF> is NOT sent after each <CR>.

________________________________________________________________________

If ALFRTTY is set ON when transmitting Baudot or ASCII RTTY, a line feed character is added and sent automatically after each <CR> character you type.

Use this option when you are typing into the transmit buffer and don't want to be bothered worrying about line length.  You should NOT use this option when re-transmitting text received from another station; for example, ARRL Bulletins.

o    ALFRTTY has no effect in AMTOR; a line feed is automatically added

after each carriage return.


  AList

  Immediate Command

  Mode: AMTOR

  Host: AL

________________________________________________________________________

ALIST is an immediate command that switches your TNC into the ARQ Listen mode.

You can usually monitor an ARQ AMTOR contact between two linked stations using the ARQ Listen mode (also called Mode L). This mode may need a few seconds to phase or acquire synchronization with the other stations.  Your ability to synchronize with the master station depends on operating conditions such as interference. Since you are not part of the "error free" link, your monitor will display retries that occur if the two linked stations you are monitoring  experience ARQ errors.

In PC-Pakratt for Windows, press the [image] button in the AMTOR or PACTOR operating windows to access ALIST.  Press ALIST (or AL) repeatedly if you lose synchronization.


ALTModem
 ALTModem  "n"

 Default: 0

 Mode: Packet

 Host: Am

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    A numeric value of 0 or 1 selecting either the default (0) PK-232 45-300/1200 baud modem, or the optional (1) 2400 BPS DPSK modem.

________________________________________________________________________

n is a numerical value 0 or 1, selecting the standard PK-232 modem (ALTMODEM 0, default) or the optional 2400 BPS modem (ALTMODEM 1). Only the Packet mode uses ALTMODEM 1. In all other modes, one of the internal FSK/CW modems is selected.

ALTMODEM is used only when the optional internal 2400 BPS DPSK modem has been factory installed in a PK-232 MBX. Remember to set HBAUD, to 2400 when using this modem.  The ALTMODEM command is not available in other TNCs.  See the MODEM command in the PK-900 and DSP TNCs to select modems.


  AMtor

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Command

  Host: AM

________________________________________________________________________

AMTOR is an immediate command that switches your TNC (Radio Port 1 of dual port TNCs) into the AMTOR mode. Your TNC is automatically placed in ARQ Standby condition.  Pressing the [image] button from the PC-Pakratt for windows AMTOR window puts the TNC into AMTOR Standby.

Your station is then available for automatic access by and response to any AMTOR station that sends your SELCALL. The TNC can communicate using either the CCIR 476 (4-character SELCALL) or the CCIR 625 (7-character SELCALL) protocol. Your monitor will also display any inbound FEC (Mode B) transmissions.

See the MYSELCAL and MYIDENT commands to enter your 4 and 7 character SELCALLs.


ANalog

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Command

  Host: An

________________________________________________________________________

ANALOG is an immediate command that switches Radio Port 1 of your TNC into the ANALOG mode. Your PK-900 or DSP unit is automatically placed in the ANALOG Standby condition and the modem number selected in the QFAX command is loaded.  ANALOG is not available in the PK-232 MBX.

Most PK-900 and DSP users will not use this mode the way Packet and Baudot are used. Rather, application display programs will use this mode to process FAX and SSTV signals allowing gray scale and color images to be displayed. The Analog mode passes data for communications modes that require "gray scales" such as FAX and  SSTV.  In DSP products, ANALOG is similar to the DSPDATA mode, except that in ANALOG the unit samples on a timer interrupt (see the ANSAMPLE command below).  In the PK-900 ANALOG enables a zero-crossing detector so the AEA-FAX 900 program can be used.

In the DSP units, ANALOG requires an 8-bit Analog type of DSP modem that samples and digitizes the analog information. After the signal is sampled, it is sent to the RS-232 serial port to the host computer for processing.

Presently, DSP Modems 41, 42 and 43 are available for use in the Analog mode. Modem 41 is designed for HF FM facsimile operation and digitizes audio frequencies from 1,450 Hz to 2,500 Hz.  Modem 42 is designed for satellite APT facsimile operation and digitizes the amplitude of a 2,400 Hz audio carrier. Modem 43 is designed for SSTV operation and digitizes audio frequencies from 900 Hz to 2,500 Hz. All Analog modems digitize the samples into 8 bit binary quantities with the lowest frequency or amplitude represented by $00 and the highest represented by $FF. Analog modems may also be used in the DSPDATA mode.

To use the Analog mode in a DSP unit, the computer program should first set QFAX and ANSAMPLE, then enter the ANALOG mode. ANALOG initializes in the standby  receive state.  The following commands function in other operating modes and now control the ANALOG mode in DSP products as well.

L (Lock): Force Data receive. (Start the Digitizing Process)

R (Receive): Standby receive. (Stop the Digitizing Process)

X (Xmit):   Data transmit.  (Not Yet Implemented in the DSP units)

The TRACE command also functions in DSP Analog mode.  TRACE OFF (default) sends the data as one binary character per sample. TRACE ON causes the data to be sent to the user as 2 hex characters per sample for test purposes. UserBIT 20 (UBIT 20) also affects the data presentation.


ANSample
ANSample   "n"

  Default: 2000

  Mode:  Analog

  Host: As

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -   900 to 65535 decimal specifies a number to be loaded into the 8536 timer chip to control the Analog mode sample rate.

________________________________________________________________________

The value n is sent directly to the 8536 timer chip to control the sample rate of the ANALOG mode. The number of samples per second is controlled by the following formula:

    Samples/second  =  2,000,000 / ANSAMPLE.

The default value of n is 2000, meaning 1000 samples/sec.  The lower limit on ANSAMPLE (900) corresponds to 2,222 Samples/second. Attempting to set ANSAMPLE  to a value lower than 900 (more than 2222 samples per second) produces the "range" error. This limit may change in the future.  ANSAMPLE is not available on the PK-232 MBX.


ARq
ARq aaaa[aaa]

   Immediate Command

   Mode: AMTOR

   Host: AC

________________________________________________________________________

aaaa[aaa]   -   The distant station's 4-character or 7-character

SELCALL code.

________________________________________________________________________

ARQ is an immediate command that starts an AMTOR Mode A (ARQ) SELCALL (SELective CALL) to a distant station.

Press the [image] button on the tool bar of the AMTOR operating window to bring up the AMTOR calling dialog menu.

Example: ARQ NNML     (4-character SELCALL)

or         ARQ VTMFFFF  (7-character SELCALL)

As soon as a <CR> is typed, your TNC will begin keying your transmitter(Radio Port 1 of dual port TNCs) in the three-character AMTOR ARQ burst sequence. If the distant station receives and decodes your selective call successfully, the two AMTOR systems synchronize and begin the Mode A (ARQ) AMTOR "handshaking" process.

See the MYSELCAL and MYIDENT commands to enter your 4- and 7- character SELCALLs. Other AMTOR commands are ACHG, ACRRTTY, ADELAY, ALFRTTY, ARQTMO, EAS, HEREIS, and RECEIVE.


ARQE

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Command (NAVTEX/TDM)

  Host: Ae

________________________________________________________________________

ARQE is an immediate command that switches your TNC (Radio Port 1 of dual port TNCs) into the ARQ-E receiving mode.  Press the [image] button in the NAVTEX/TDM operating window to enter the ARQ-E receive mode.

ARQ-E is similar to 1-channel TDM, except that the 7-bit code is different. Like TDM most ARQ-E stations send idle signals for long periods of time. The TNC can only phase on ARQ-E signals that are idling so this is not a problem.

The SIGNAL Identification (SIAM) mode will identify ARQ-E signals for the user. They are identified as "TDM ARQ-E:4" or "TDM ARQ-E:8," referring to 4- and 8- character repetition cycles used in this mode.

While in ARQE Mode, the PPWIN's TDM button will be depressed showing the TNC is in TDM since ARQE is a form of TDM.


ARQTmo
ARQTmo   "n"

  Default: 60

  Mode: AMTOR and PACTOR

  Host: AO

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -     0 to 250 specifies the number of seconds to send an ARQ SELCALL or PTCONN before automatic transmitter shutdown.

________________________________________________________________________

ARQTMO sets the length of time during which your AMTOR ARQ SELCALL and PACTOR PTCONN calls will be sent, shutting down automatically. As a general rule, if you can't activate another AMTOR or PACTOR station in the default time of 60 seconds, you can probably assume that the other station can't hear your transmission.


ARQTOL
ARQTOL  "n"

  Default: 3

  Mode:  AMTOR ARQ

  Host: Ao

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -   1 to 5, specifying a relative tolerance for bit boundary jitter.

________________________________________________________________________

ARQTOL controls the tolerance for received bit boundary jitter in AMTOR ARQ mode.  n is a number from 1 (tight tolerance) to 5 (loose tolerance). The number signifies how far away from the expected bit transition time the actual received transition may be, in tenths of a bit milliseconds). If the transition occurs further away than expected, the received block is counted as an error, even if all three characters in the block appear to be valid AMTOR characters. The default value of ARQTOL 3 is the equivalent of the fixed tolerance of previous firmware releases.

ARQTOL should be set to a low number (tighter tolerance) for applications that require nearly error-free communications.  The tradeoff is that good received character blocks are counted as bad if the bit transitions are suspect, thereby causing re-transmissions and lowering the effective character rate.

ARQTOL does not affect FEC, SELFEC or ARQ Listen modes.


 ARXTor

Default: OFF

 Mode:  AMTOR and PACTOR

 Host: Ar

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   Enables automatic detection and switching between AMTOR and PACTOR modes.

OFF -    Disables the automatic detection of non-selected operating modes..

________________________________________________________________________

The ARXTOR command allows the automatic switching from PACTOR Listen mode to AMTOR FEC receive, and from PACTOR Standby to AMTOR ARQ. It also allows the automatic switching from AMTOR Listen to AMTOR FEC receive. Press the [image] button in the PACTOR Status Window to enable ARXTOR.

When ARXTOR is ON, an AMTOR FEC signal is detected by ALIST and PTLIST modes as well as AMTOR Standby mode. There are two methods of FEC mode recognition. AMTOR Standby, ALIST and PTLIST all use FEC idles to recognize FEC transmissions. In the AMTOR Standby mode however, FEC test patterns are recognized as an additional quick recognition method which my speed locking on to a FEC signal.

ARXTOR ON enables PTLIST mode to monitor AMTOR ARQ transmissions.

ARXTOR ON also means an incoming AMTOR ARQ call is recognized in PACTOR Standby mode. Only a call for the selcall in MYSELCAL is recognized; PACTOR can not detect ARQ calls to MYALTCAL or MYIDENT.

When a PACTOR mode detects an AMTOR transmission, there is an added delay before the text is shown. The unit must switch over from PACTOR to AMTOR, where the signal is again detected. For fastest detection of AMTOR FEC, the unit should be in AMTOR Standby mode. For fasted syncing on AMTOR ARQ signals, the unit should be in ALIST mode.

At the end of the new mode (AMTOR ARQ or FEC), the unit returns to the original monitoring mode (AMTOR, ALIST, PACTOR or PTLIST).

PC-Pakratt for Windows detects mode change by ARXTOR from PACTOR to AMTOR and AMTOR to PACTOR and changes the Status Windows appropriately.

 Target mode detection    AMTOR    ALIST     PACTOR    PTLIST

 ---------------------   -------  -------   -------  -------

 AMTOR FEC               if RFEC  if ARXT            if ARXT

 AMTOR ARQ (MYSELCAL)    always             if ARXT

 AMTOR ARQ (MYALTCAL)    always

 AMTOR ARQ (MYIDENT)     always

 monitor AMTOR ARQ                always             if ARXT

 SELFEC                  always   if ARXT            if ARXT

 monitor SELFEC          if SRX   if ARXT & SRX      if ARXT & SRX

 PTCONN                                     always   always

 monitor PACTOR                                      always

Note:

When automatically switching from PACTOR to ATMOR and back again, the modem is not changed. This maximizes the number of monitored characters since no characters can be copied during DSP modem loading.


AScii

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Command

  Host: AS

________________________________________________________________________

ASCII is an immediate command that switches your TNC (Radio Port 1 of dual port TNCs) into the ASCII mode.

ASCII is the proper mode to use if you wish to use RTTY to transmit text, data or other information containing lower case and special characters not present in the Baudot/Murray and ITA #2 alphabets or character sets.  When 8BITCONV is set ON, 8-bit ASCII data may also be sent and received.  The ABAUD command sets the ASCII on the air data rate.

Because the ASCII character set requires a minimum of seven bits to define each character, under worst-case conditions, ASCII is more subject to data errors and garbled text than Baudot/ITA#2 at the same data rate.


ASPect
ASPect   "n"

  Default: 2 (576)

  Mode:  FAX

  Host: AY

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -   1 to 6, specifying the number of FAX scan lines the TNC prints out of every 6 lines received.

________________________________________________________________________

ASPECT controls the aspect ratio of the length to the width of a FAX image by controlling the number of lines the TNC  prints out of each 6 received lines.

On most weather charts, the default of ASPECT 2 keeps the shapes received in the right proportion. On other transmissions, you may want more resolution.

See the table below for suggested settings.

CCITT IOCs for narrow and wide carriage printers are given for each ASPECT setting below.

ASPECT  CCITT IOC (narrow) 	CCITT IOC (wide)

 1     	1100                       	1788

 2     	550  (Weather Charts 576)  	894

 3     	367  (Wire photos 352)     	596(Wx Charts 576)

 4     	275  (WEFAX Satellite 288) 	447

 5     	220                        	358(Wire photos 352)

 6     	183                        	298(WEFAX Satellite 288)

The Index Of Cooperation, or IOC is an international measure of aspect ratio. The formula for the CCITT IOC is:

  (vertical scan line density) X (horizontal width)

   _______________________________________________

                   3.14159

Weather charts are transmitted at a nominal CCITT IOC of 576. ASPECT 2 is so close to this that the charts print with no noticeable distortion.

Please note that high settings of ASPECT such as 6 may generate data so often that your printer cannot handle the high data rate.


ATxrtty
ATxrtty   "n"

  Default: 0 (0 msec.)

  Mode: Morse,Baudot,  and ASCII

  Host: At

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -     0 - 250, signifying the length of time (in units of 100 mSec.) to delay before sending text.

________________________________________________________________________

ATXRTTY allows Morse, Baudot or ASCII characters to be transmitted automatically whenever they are typed and the data controller is in the converse mode. When all the characters in the buffer have been sent, the unit reverts to receive.

The number n represents the length of time from the last character typed to the dropping of PTT. This feature makes the repeated use of the commands RCVE and XMIT unnecessary.


AUdelay
AUdelay   "n/n"

  Default: 2/2 (20 msec.)

  Mode: Baudot, ASCII, FEC, FAX, Packet and PACTOR

  Host: AQ

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -     0 - 120 specifies in units of 10 msec. intervals, the delay between PTT going active and the start of the transmit AFSK audio tones (on each TNC Radio Port.)

________________________________________________________________________

In some applications it may be desirable to create a delay from the time that the radio PTT line is keyed and the time that audio is produced from the TNC. Most notably, on HF when an amplifier is used, arcing of the amplifier relay contacts may occur if drive to the amplifier is applied before the contacts have closed.  If arcing occurs, increase AUDELAY for that Radio Port slowly until the arcing stops.

In VHF or UHF FM operation, some synthesized transceivers may produce undesirable spurious emissions, if audio and PTT are applied at the same time. These emissions may be reduced by setting AUDELAY to roughly 1/2 of TXDELAY.

Please note that AUDELAY must always be less than TXDELAY.  It is advisable that AUDELAY be set lower than TXDELAY by a setting of 10. For example, you have determined that a TXDELAY of 20 works well for your transceiver.  Subtracting 10 from 20 yields 10, which is the recommended setting for AUDELAY. If a setting of AUDELAY of 10 is too short, then set both TXDELAY and AUDELAY higher.

Note that AUDELAY does not function on the PK-88 and PCB-88 TNCs.


AUTOBaud
AUTOBaud   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Command

  Host: Ab

________________________________________________________________________

ON    -    Autobaud Routine always present at Power-ON or RESTART.

OFF  -    Autobaud Routine active at Power-ON only if battery jumper is removed.

________________________________________________________________________________

When AUTOBAUD is OFF (default), the unit performs the autobaud function only when powering ON or after a RESET.  When AUTOBAUD is ON, the TNC performs the autobaud routine EVERY time it is powered ON, and EVERY time the RESTART command is entered.  The stored parameters (e.g. MYCALL) are saved if the battery jumper is connected.  The unit displays the autobaud message at the same rate as the last  setting of TBAUD.

AUTOBAUD ON is helpful when moving the unit from one computer to another, where the terminal data rates are different.  PC-Pakratt for Windows will always load the parameters on start-up when AUTOBAUD is ON.

In the autobaud routine, only one asterisk (*) is needed to set the terminal speed TBAUD.  The autobaud routine detects 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 and 9600 baud, at either 7 bits even parity, or 8 bits no parity.


AWlen
AWlen   "n"

  Default: 8

  Mode: All

  Host: AW

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -  7 or 8 specifies the number of data bits per word.

________________________________________________________________________

The parameter defines the digital word length used by the RS-232 serial input/output (I/O) port to communicate with PC-Packratt for Windows.  While AEA TNCs will use either 7 or 8, all Host mode programs must use 8 data bits and No parity.  PC-Pakratt for Windows sets this automatically for you.

If you will be using PC-Pakratt for Windows with other communications you should always use the same terminal baud rate (TBAUD), Word length 8 and PARITY (None) between programs.  This will make switching between programs much easier.


Ax25l2v2
Ax25l2v2   ON|OFF/ON|OFF

  Default: ON/ON

  Mode: Packet

  Host: AV

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   The TNC uses AX.25 Level 2 Version 2.0 protocol on Port x.

OFF -   The TNC uses AX.25 Level 2 Version 1.0 protocol on Port x.

________________________________________________________________________

This command allows the selection of either the old (version 1) version of the AX.25 packet protocol or the current (version 2.0) protocol on each Radio Port.  Some implementations of version 1 of AX.25 protocol won't properly digipeat Version 2.0 AX.25 packets.  Most users run  AX.25 version 2 but this command allows returning to the older version if necessary for  compatibility.

Some users also prefer to run AX.25 version 1 on HF and version 2 on VHF.  The default is to run version 2 on both Radio Ports, but it can easily be changed.


AXDelay
AXDelay   "n/n"

  Default: 0/0 (00 msec.)

  Mode: Packet

  Host: AX

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    0 to 180  specifies a key-up delay for voice repeater operation in ten-millisecond intervals.

________________________________________________________________________

AXDELAY specifies the period of time the TNC will wait - in addition to the delay set by TXDELAY after keying the transmitter and before data is sent on each Radio Port.

Packet groups using a standard "voice" repeater to extend the range of the local area network may need to use this feature.

Repeaters with slow electromechanical relays, auxiliary links (or other circuits which delay transmission after the RF carrier is present) require more time to get RF on the air.  Try various values to find the best value for "n" if you're using a repeater that hasn't been used for packet operations before.  If other packet stations have been using the repeater, check with them for the proper setting. AXDELAY acts together with AXHANG.


AXHang
AXHang   "n/n"

  Default: 0/0 (000 msec.)

  Mode: Packet

  Host: AH

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    0 to 20 specifies voice repeater "hang time" in 100-millisecond intervals.

________________________________________________________________________

AXHANG allows you to increase efficiency when sending packets through an audio repeater that has a hang time greater than 100 milliseconds.

When the TNC has heard a packet sent within the AXHANG period, it does not add the repeater key-up delay (AXDELAY) to the key-up time.  Try various values to find the best value for "n" if you are using a voice repeater that hasn't been used for packet operations before.  If other packet stations have been using the repeater, check with them for the proper setting.


BAudot

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Command

  Host: BA

________________________________________________________________________

BAUDOT is an immediate command that switches the TNC into the Baudot mode (Radio Port 1 of dual port TNCs).

Baudot RTTY operation is very common around the world, and is the basis of the telex network and most radio press, weather and point-to-point message services.  To set the Baudot RTTY data rate, see the RBAUD command.

The Baudot/Murray and ITA #2 character sets do not contain lower case or the special punctuation and control characters found in ASCII. Because the Baudot/ITA #2 code requires only five information bits to define each character, it will generally suffer fewer errors than ASCII code at the same data rate.


BBSmsgs
  BBSmsgs   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: BB

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   Makes the TNC status messages look like the TAPR-style output.

OFF -   The TNC status messages work as before (default).

________________________________________________________________________

When BBSMSGS is ON, some of the status messages change or are suppressed which may improve operation of the TNC with some BBS software.  The following AEA TNC status messages are suppressed or changed if BBSMSGS is ON:

   No "(parm) was (value)"

   No "(parm) now (value)"

   Connect messages: No "; v2; 1 unACKed"

   No "xxx in progress: (dest) via (digis)"

   No space after comma in digipeater lists

   "VIA" in upper case

   If MRPT is ON, digi paths are displayed in TAPR format

   No "*** connect request:"

   No "*** retry count exceeded"

   Sends carriage return before all other "***"

   No "(callsign) busy" message


Beacon
  Beacon   EVERY|AFTER "n"/EVERY|AFTER "n"

  Default: EVERY 0/EVERY 0 (00 sec.)

  Mode: Packet

  Host: BE

________________________________________________________________________

EVERY -  Send the beacon at regular intervals.

AFTER  -  Send the beacon after the specified time interval without activity.

"n"    -    0 to 250 sets beacon timing in ten-second intervals.

"0"    -    Zero turns off the beacon (default).

________________________________________________________________________

The BEACON command sets the conditions under which your beacon will be sent (on each PK-900 or DSP Radio Port).

A beacon frame contains the text that you've typed into the BTEXT message in a packet addressed to the UNPROTO address.  When the keyword EVERY is specified a beacon packet is sent every "n" times ten seconds. When AFTER is specified, a beacon is sent after "n" times ten seconds have passed without packet activity.

If you set the BEACON timing less than "90" - a value judged as too short for busy channels - you'll see the following message at each command prompt:

   WARNING: BEACON too often

Use Beacons with care and consideration for other users of the Packet channel.


BItinv
 BItinv    "n"

 Default: $00

 Mode:  RTTY

 Host: BI

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    0 to $1F, (0 to 31 decimal) specifies a number to be exclusive-ORed with every received Baudot character.  BITINV 0 is plain text.

________________________________________________________________________

Bit inversion is used to prevent listeners from reading some commercial Baudot transmissions. Usually either 2 or 3 bits of each character are inverted to give the appearance of an encrypted transmission. Try different settings of BITINV on a Baudot signal after the baud rate has been determined. If you are interested encrypted transmissions try experimenting with the 5BIT command.

BITINV may also be accessed from the Signal Identification window.


BKondel
  BKondel   ON|OFF

  Default: ON

  Mode: All

  Host: BK

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    The sequence <BACKSPACE><SPACE><BACKSPACE> is echoed when a character is deleted from the input line.

OFF -    The <BACKSLASH> character <\> is echoed when a character is deleted.

________________________________________________________________________

BKONDEL determines how character deletion is displayed in Command or Converse mode.  When BKONDEL is ON (default) the <BACKSPACE><SPACE><BACKSPACE> sequence is produced which updates the video display screen erasing the character.

On a printing terminal the <BACKSPACE><SPACE><BACKSPACE> sequence will result in over-typed text. Set BKONDEL OFF if you have a paper-output display, or if your terminal does not respond to the <BACKSPACE> character <CTRL-H>.  When BKONDEL is OFF the TNC displays a <BACKSLASH> for each character you delete. You can get a display of the corrected input by typing the REDISPLA-line character.


BText
  BText text

  Default: empty

  Mode: Packet

  Host: BT

________________________________________________________________________

text   -   Any combination of characters up to a maximum length of 120 characters.

________________________________________________________________________

BTEXT is the content of the data portion of a beacon packet. The default text is an empty string (no message). When and how packet beacons are sent is discussed in more detail under the BEACON command.

Although the beacon subject is controversial in packet circles, you can use beacon texts intelligently and benefit the packet community.

o    Don't type your call sign in BTEXT - the normal packet header shows

it.

o    Don't fill BTEXT with screen graphics. Use BTEXT for meaningful

information.

o    After you've beaconed for a week or two and people know who you

are, follow the practice used by more experienced packeteers:  SET

BEACON EVERY 0!

o    Use a "%," "&", "N," "NO," "NONE," or OFF as the first characters

in the text to clear the BTEXT text.


  CALibrate

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Command (Dumb Terminal)

  Host: Not Supported

________________________________________________________________________

CALIBRATE is an immediate command that starts the AFSK transmit tone calibration routine.  You must be in the Dumb Terminal mode to start the CALIBRATE mode.

The PK-232 will provide a continuous on-screen display of AFSK generator tone frequencies in Hertz.  All other TNCs will simply display a blank screen.  The CALIBRATE command simplifies transmitter calibration of the AFSK level for each Radio Port.

When Calibration is checked all packet connections will be lost, and the time-of-day clock will not advance until you quit the calibration routine.

Commands available in the calibration routine are:

K         Toggles the TNC's PTT and CW keying outputs between ON and OFF.

Q         Quits the calibration routine.

H         Toggles the generator between wide (1000 Hz) and narrow (200 Hz) shift.

<SPACE>   Toggles the audio tone between "mark" (low) and "space" (high) tones.

D         Toggles between transmitting a continuous tone or alternating the mark

and space tones at a rate set by the radio baud (HBAUD) rate.


CANline
  CANline   "n"

  Default: $18 <CTRL-X>

  Mode: All

  Host: CL

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    0 to $7F (0 to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.

________________________________________________________________________

The parameter "n" is the ASCII code for the character you want to use to cancel an input line. You can enter the code in either hex or decimal.

When you use the CANLINE character to cancel an input line in Command Mode, the line is terminated with a <BACKSLASH> character and a new prompt (cmd:) appears.

When you cancel lines in CONVERSE Mode, only a <BACKSLASH> and a new line appear.

o    You can cancel only the line you are currently typing.

o    Once <CR> or <Enter> has been typed, you cannot cancel an input line.

NOTE:     If your send-packet character is not <CR> or <Enter>, the cancel-line character cancels only the last line of a multi-line packet.


CANPac
  CANPac   "n"

  Default: $19 <CTRL-Y)

  Mode: Packet, Command

  Host: CP

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    0 to $7F (0 to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.

________________________________________________________________________

The parameter "n" is the ASCII code for the character you want to type in order to cancel an input packet or to cancel display output from the TNC.

You can only cancel the packet that is being entered in CONVERSE Mode. When you cancel a packet, the line is terminated with a <BACKSLASH> and a new line. You must cancel the packet before typing the send-packet character.

In the COMMAND mode, this character cancels displayed output from the TNC. Typing this character once cancels ALL output from the TNC to your display. Typing the cancel-output character again restores normal output.


CASedisp
  CASedisp   "n"

  Default: 0 (as is)

  Mode: All

  Host: CX

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    0 to 2 specifies how your TNC sends characters to your terminal.

________________________________________________________________________

CASEDISP allows you to set the case of the characters your TNC sends to your terminal. CASEDISP offers three possible modes:

CASEDISP 0 "As is" - characters are not changed.

CASEDISP 1 "lower" - all characters are displayed in lower case only.

CASEDISP 2 "UPPER" - all characters are displayed in upper case only.

CASEDISP has no effect on your transmitted data.


CBell
  CBell   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet, AMTOR and PACTOR

  Host: CU

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   Three BELL characters <CTRL-G> ($07) are sent to your terminal with the "*** CONNECTED to or DISCONNECTED from (call sign)" message.

OFF  -   BELLS are NOT sent with the CONNECTED or DISCONNECTED message.

________________________________________________________________________

Set CBELL ON if you want to be notified when someone connects to or disconnects from your station in Packet.  Bell characters are also sent when someone establishes a link to you in AMTOR or PACTOR.


CFrom
  CFrom   all, none, yes/no call1[,call2..] /  all, none, yes/no call1[,call2..]

  Default: all/all

  Mode: Packet

  Host: CF

________________________________________________________________________

call   -  all, none, YES list, NO list.

List of up to 8 call signs, separated by commas.

________________________________________________________________________

CFROM determines how your TNC responds to connect requests from other stations on each Radio Port. CFROM is set to "all/all" when you first start your TNC.

To reject all call requests on Radio Port 1, type CFROM NONE.  Your TNC sends the calling station a DM packet, or "busy signal."

To reject all call requests on both Radio Ports, type CFROM NONE/NONE. Your TNC sends the calling station a DM packet, or "busy signal."

To accept calls from one or more specific stations on Radio Port 2, type CFROM /YES (followed by a list of calls signs).  Connects will be accepted from stations whose call signs are listed after CFROM YES.  For example:

 cmd:cfrom /yes WX1AAA,WX2BBB,WX3CCC,WX4DDD

To reject calls from one or more specific stations on Radio Port 1, type CFROM NO (followed by a list of call signs).  Connect requests will be ignored from stations whose call signs are listed after CFROM NO.

You can include optional SSIDs specified as "-n" after the call sign.  If CFROM is set to "no KD4JP", connect attempts from all SSIDs of KD4JP (KD4JP-0 through KD4JP-15) will be ignored.  If CFROM is set to "yes KD4JP-1", then only KD4JP-1 will be allowed to connect. Clear CFROM with "%" "&" or "OFF" as arguments.


CHCall
  CHCall   ON|OFF

  Default:  OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: CB

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   Call sign of the distant station IS displayed in multiple connection or multiple port packet operation.

OFF -   Call sign of the distant station is NOT displayed (default).

________________________________________________________________________

With CHCALL ON, the call signs of the distant stations appear after the channel identifier when you are connected to more than one packet station, or on more than one Radio Port. When CHCALL is OFF (default), only the channel designator is displayed in multiple connection operation.

When CHCALL is OFF, the monitored activity looks like this:

  :0hi John                 	{data from Radio Port 1}

    hello Mike how goes it?

  :A*** CONNECTED to N7GMF  {data from Radio Port 2}

  :Amust be a dx record. ge John

When CHCALL is ON, the same contact has the additional underlined information:

  :0:N7ML:hi John            	  {data from Radio Port 1}

  hello Mike how goes it?

  :A:N7GMF:*** CONNECTED to N7GMF  {data from Radio Port 2}

  :Amust be a dx record. ge John

CHCALL is only used in PPWIN's Dumb Terminal Mode.


CHDouble
  CHDouble   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: CD

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    Received CHSWITCH characters appear twice (doubled).

OFF -    Received CHSWITCH characters appear once (not doubled).

________________________________________________________________________

CHDOUBLE ON displays received CHSWITCH characters as doubled characters.

Set CHDOUBLE ON When operating with multiple connections or multiple Radio Ports to tell the difference between CHSWITCH characters received from other stations and CHSWITCH characters generated by your TNC.  In the following example CHDOUBLE is ON and CHSWITCH is set to "|" ($7C):

     || this is a test.

The sending station actually transmitted:

     | this is a test.

The same frame received with CHDOUBLE OFF would be displayed as:

     | this is a test.

CHDOUBLE is only used in PPWIN's Dumb Terminal Mode.


CHeck
 CHeck    "n/n"

 Default: 30/30 (300 sec.)

 Mode: Packet

 Host: CK

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 250 specifies the check time in ten-second intervals.

0    -    Zero disables this feature.

________________________________________________________________________

CHECK sets a time-out value for a packet connection on each Radio Port if the distant station has not been heard from for CHECK times 10 seconds.

Without the CHECK feature, if your TNC were connected to another station and the other station disappeared, your TNC would remain connected indefinitely, perhaps refusing connections from other stations.

Your TNC tries to prevent this sort of "lockup" from occurring depending on the settings of AX25L2V2 and RELINK, by using the CHECK timer as follows:

o    If a Version 1 link is inactive for (CHECK times 10 seconds), your TNC tries to save the link by starting a reconnect sequence.  The TNC enters the "connect in progress" state and sends "connect request" frames.

o    If a Version 2 link (AX25L2V2 ON) is inactive and packets have not been heard from the distant end for "n" times 10 seconds, your TNC sends a "check packet" to test if the link still exists to the other station.  If your TNC does not get an answer to the "check packet" after RETRY+1 attempts, it will attempt to reconnect to the distant station.


CHSwitch
  CHSwitch   "n"

  Default: $00

  Mode: All

  Host: CH

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    0 to $FF (0 to 255 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.

________________________________________________________________________

CHSWITCH selects the character used by both the TNC and the user to show that a new Radio Port or packet logical channel is being addressed.  Chapter 4 of this manual contains a detailed description of this procedure.

In PC-Pakratt for windows, the up and Down arrow keys (­¯) access the packet channels in the Packet window and the scroll-back buffer.  You do not need to enter a CHSWITCH character when using PC-Pakratt for windows.

DO NOT USE $30 to $39 (0 to 9), $41 to $5A (A-Z) or $61 to $7A (a-z).

If you plan to use both Radio Ports or multiple packet connections in the Dumb Terminal Mode, you must select a CHannel SWITCHing character. This character will be interpreted by the TNC to indicate that you want to select another Radio Port or "logical" packet channel. The vertical bar "|" ($7C) is not used often in conversations and makes a good switching character. To make the Channel Switching character the vertical bar, simply enter the command CHSWITCH $7C.

To change the logical packet channel you are using with the TNC, then simply type the vertical bar "|" followed by a number 0 through 9 ( or a letter A through Z for accessing DSP Port 2 channels). The numbers 0-9 select a logical channel on your TNC (DSP Radio Port 1). The letters A-Z indicate a channel on the DSP Radio Port 2.

See CHDOUBLE and CHCALL for further information on the use of CHSWITCH.


CMdtime
  CMdtime   "n"

  Default: 10 (1000 msec.)

  Mode: All

  Host: CQ

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 250  specifies TRANSPARENT and HOST Mode time-out value in 100- millisecond intervals.

If "n" is 0 (zero), exit from TRANSPARENT Mode requires sending the BREAK signal or interruption of power to the TNC.

________________________________________________________________________

CMDTIME sets the time-out value in Transparent and HOST Modes.  A guard time of "n" times 10 seconds allows escape to Command Mode from Transparent Mode, while permitting any character to be sent as data.

The same Command Mode entry character COMMAND (default <CTRL-C>) is used to exit Transparent Mode, although the procedure is different than from Converse mode.

Three Command Mode entry characters must be entered less than "n" times 10 seconds apart, with no intervening characters, after a delay of "n" times 10 seconds following the last characters typed.

     The following diagram illustrates this timing:

_____________________________________________________

last           first       second	  third       TNC now

terminal      COMMAND      COMMAND       COMMAND     in Cmd

input         character    character     character   Mode

|              entry        entry        entry      |

|             |            |            |           |

|             |            |            |           |

|<--longer--->|<--shorter->|<-shorter ->|<----n---->|

   than "n"      than "n"     than "n"


CMSg
  CMSg   ON|OFF/ON|OFF

  Default: OFF/OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: CM

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   The recorded CTEXT message is sent as the first packet after a connection is established by a connect request from a distant station.

OFF -   The text message is not sent at all.

________________________________________________________________________

CMSG (default OFF) enables or disables automatic transmission of the CTEXT message when your TNC accepts a connect request from another station.  CMSG is settable for each radio port of a DSP-2232 or PK-900.

Set CMSG ON to give others a message when they connect to your TNC or invite them to leave a message on your MailDrop if you are not there.

See MTEXT for a similar MailDrop message feature.


CODe
  CODe   "n"

  Default: 0 (International)

  Mode:  Baudot RTTY, Morse, AMTOR, Packet

  Host: C1

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -   0 to 5 specifies a code from the list below.

CODE	Meaning	Morse    Baudot     AMTOR    PACKET

 0      International           RX/TX   RX/TX      RX/TX      -

 1      US teleprinter            -     RX/TX      RX/TX      -

 2      Cyrillic                 RX     RX/TX      RX/TX      -

 3      Transliterated Cyrillic  RX     RX         RX         -

 4      Katakana                 RX/TX    -         -         -

 5      Transliterated Katakana  RX       -         -         -

 6      European                  -       -         -         RX

 7      Tor lower case            -       -        RX/TX      -

 8      Extended Tor Lower case   -       -        RX/TX      -

________________________________________________________________________

Note that not all the codes in the list above can be transmitted.  In the Morse, Baudot and AMTOR columns below, RX means receive only, and RX/TX means both transmit and receive are enabled.

NOTE:     FCC Part 97.69 and 97.131 calls for the use of (CODE 0) "International Telegraph Alphabet Number 2" five unit teleprinter code. The Baudot characters "$", "#" and "&" are NOT permitted for use by US Amateurs.

CODE 0:   International

In Morse, this means the International Morse Code.

For Baudot and AMTOR, this means the ITA #2 teleprinter code, which is internationally recommended for Baudot and TOR communications and shown below:

LOWER CASE SET	                 UPPER CASE SET

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - =         ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ( ) ? +

Q W E R T Y U I O P ? ?         Q W E R T Y U I O P ? ?

A S D F G H J K L ? '           A S D F G H J K L : ?

Z X C V B N M , . /             Z X C V B N M , . ?

The following special Morse characters are available as receive only and are used in non-English Morse alphabets.

          Morse            Receive

     ----               ch

     -.-..              c

     .-..-              e

     --..-              z

     --.--              ñ

In response to requests from European customers, the "national" ITA#2 characters unassigned in the US have been made available for both transmission and reception.  FIGS-F, FIGS-G and FIGS-H have been assigned characters according to standard use and are shown below. Note that some national alphabets use these characters for accented letters not appearing in English.

       Baudot       ITA #2          U.S.

     Character	CODE 0          CODE 1

      FIGS-F	       |	    !

      FIGS-G	       {	    &

      FIGS-H	       }	    #

      3rd-Q	       q

CODE 1:   US  Teleprinter

In Morse, this has no effect; the unit will use the International Morse Code and NOT the American Morse code.  In Baudot and AMTOR, the US teleprinter character set shown below is used.  Users of CODE 1 should be aware of the following:

The US teleprinter code (CODE 1) makes the "!", "$", "'" and "#" characters available in Baudot and AMTOR.  The WRU character, "=" and the "+" characters are lost when CODE is set to 1.  Since there is no "+" character in the CODE 1 character set there should be no way to turn over the AMTOR link and change from ISS to the IRS.  To avoid this problem, the TNC sends a FIGS-Z when the "+" key is pressed in AMTOR and responds to the reception of the "FIGS-Z" "?" sequence so the direction of traffic can be reversed.

US Teleprinter character set.

 LOWER CASE SET                 UPPER CASE SET

 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 -         !   # $     &   ( )

 Q W E R T Y U I O P           Q W E R T Y U I O P

 A S D F G H J K L ; '         A S D F G H J K L : '

 Z X C V B N M , . /           Z X C V B N M , . ?

The differences between ITA #2 and US teleprinter codes are listed below:

     Baudot              ITA #2          U.S.

    Character             CODE 0        CODE 1

     FIGS-D                WRU           $

     FIGS-F                |	          !

     FIGS-G                {             &

     FIGS-H                }             #

     FIGS-J               BELL           '

     FIGS-S                '            BELL

     FIGS-V                =             ;

     FIGS-Z                +             "

     3rd-Q                 q

Please Note that for U.S. Amateurs, the F.C.C. regulations require Baudot and AMTOR transmissions follow CCIR Recommendations which require the ITA#2 (CODE 0) be used.  Technically it is illegal to use CODE 1 on the U.S. Amateur bands. MARS operators and Amateurs outside the U.S. may however find CODE 1 useful.

CODE 2:   Cyrillic

This code causes a translation to an artificially extended ASCII, so that all received characters are converted to single ASCII characters. The character set used prior to July 1991 was arbitrary, but we have now changed the character set to one which we believe to be used presently in the USSR.

The extensions used in Morse reception are shown below:

 Morse          ASCII         English  pronunciation

   .-.-         $71 q          YA

   ---.         $7E ~          CH      (Morse only)

   ..--	        $60 '          YU

   --.-         $7D ]          SHCH

   ----         $7B {          SH

In Baudot and AMTOR, Russian transmitters use a third register to transmit Cyrillic characters in addition to the LTRS and FIGS. They use LTRS to transmit the Roman alphabet. As LTRS and FIGS characters are used to access the first and second registers, they use the BLK or NUL character (00) to access the third register.  The TNC displays third-register characters as lower case alphabetic characters, and all FIGS characters as in CODE 0 with the following exceptions:

 Character        CODE 2         English  pronunciation

   FIGS-F         $7C  |          E

   FIGS-G         $7B  {          SH

   FIGS-H         $7D  }          SHCH

   FIGS-J         $60  '          YU

   3rd-Q          $71  q          YA

If several words end in "OJ", "OW" or "OGO" the transmission is probably Russian.

There is no separate Baudot combination for the CH character.  The Russians use a "4" because the Cyrillic character for CH resembles a "4".

It is safe to leave CODE set to 2 if you are not sure which alphabet the transmitting station is using. You will be able to see the message in either alphabet with minimal garbling, and you can then set CODE to either 0 or 3.

Another interesting side effect of being able to send and receive in CODE 2 is that it is now possible to send and receive both upper and lower case text in Baudot and AMTOR modes. To do this, both station must have CODE 2 enabled and of course both must be running 1991 or later firmware in their TNC's. Other users will see only upper case characters and not be aware that anything unusual is happening, as the feature merely inserts NULL characters at strategic times. An AEA TNC using CODE 2 in QSO with a unit in CODE 0 (or any other equipment) will exchange data in upper case only, with no adverse effects.

This feature may be advantageous to users of the AMTOR MailDrop who want their messages to be forwarded to the packet network. The ability to send and receive upper and lower case characters in AMTOR should improve message readability when it is translated to Packet and vice versa.

CODE  3:  Transliterated Cyrillic

This code is similar to CODE 2, except that some characters are transliterated into English phonetic equivalents for easier reading.

       CODE 2	CODE 3

       w         V

       v         ZH

       h         KH

       c         TS

       ~         CH     (Morse only)

       {         SH

       ]         SHCH

       x         '

       |         E     (RTTY only)

       '         YU

       q         YA

CODE  4:  Katakana

Katakana is the phonetic character set used in Japan for spelling out words of foreign (to Japan) origin.  The Japanese also use Katakana for Morse and some computer communication. There are about 50 Katakana characters. CODE 4 translates the Katakana Morse code into an 8-bit extended version of ASCII. The characters displayed are generally in the range from $A0 to $DF, except for numerals and punctuation.  If you are using CODE 4, remember to set the TNC for AWLEN 8, PARITY 0 and 8BITCONV ON.

CODE  5:  Transliterated Katakana

This is similar to CODE 4, except that the extended ASCII is transliterated into English equivalents for easier reading.  The Morse characters are translated into 2- and 3-letter syllables.

CODE  6:  European

This is primarily for users with German language terminals. The differences in Morse coding are as follows:

   Morse 	CODE 0      CODE 6

   .-.-	 $5B	      $5B

   ---.	 $5C	      $5C

   ..--      $5E        $5D

   .--.-     $5D

In addition, CODE 6 avoids the use of square brackets ($5B, $5D) in monitored packet headers and MailDrop prompts, using parentheses instead. US ASCII square bracket characters are used as extended alphabetic characters in most languages outside of English.

CODE  7: TOR lower case

CODE 7 applies to AMTOR operation only. It codes upper and lower case letters using the NULL character as a shift while in LTRS case. This protocol is used by APLINK stations, European mailboxes, the AMT-3 and G4BMK software. The difference between CODE 7 and CODE 2 (Cyrillic) upper/lower case is that CODE 2 uses LTRS for upper case and NULL for lower case, while CODE 7 uses the NULL to toggle between upper and lower case. CODE 7 is invisible to stations using classic AMTOR (CODE 0). However, a CODE 7 station talking to a station using CODE 2 (AEA's already existing upper/lower case protocol) will result in upper/lower case reversals or constant lower case text.

CODE  8:  Extended TOR lower case

CODE 8 also applies to AMTOR only. It includes the features of CODE 7 above and additionally codes new punctuation characters using NULL as an escape while in FIGS case. Thus CODE 8 supports all 95 printable ASCII characters ($20-$7E) plus CR, LF, space, and ENQ while in AMTOR operating mode. (They seem to have left out BELL, backspace and TAB). At the moment, this protocol is used only on links between mailboxes forwarding messages. It could be used with the AEA AMTOR-to -PACTOR gateway if all users had CODE 8. Code 8 is not invisible to other users.


COMmand
  COMmand   "n"

  Default: $03 <CTRL-C>

  Mode: All

  Host: CN

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    0 to $7F (0 to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.

________________________________________________________________________

COMMAND changes the Command Mode entry character (default <CTRL-C>). Type the COMMAND character to enter Command Mode from the Converse, Transparent or HOST Modes.  The Command prompt (cmd:) appears, indicating successful entry to Command Mode.

See the CMDTIME command for related information.


CONALARM
  CONALARM   OFF | SOFT | LOUD

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet, AMTOR and PACTOR

  Host: Not Applicable

________________________________________________________________________

 OFF -  PPWIN makes no sound when a Packet, AMTOR or PACTOR connect occurs.

 SOFT- PPWIN beeps 3 times when a Packet, AMTOR or PACTOR connect occurs.

 LOUD - PPWIN plays a tune when a Packet, AMTOR or PACTOR connect occurs.

________________________________________________________________________

CONALARM is a PPWIN parameter which controls the sound the program makes when a Packet, AMTOR or PACTOR connect occurs. When OFF, PPWIN makes no sound. When SOFT, PPWIN beeps 3 times when a connect occurs. When LOUD, PPWIN plays a tune when a Packet,  AMTOR or PACTOR connect occurs.

Note this is a PC-Pakratt for Windows only command.  The related TNC command is CBELL which is unused since CONALARM is more versatile.


CONMode
  CONMode   CONVERSE|TRANS

  Default: CONVERSE

  Mode: Packet, AMTOR, PACTOR

  Host: CE

________________________________________________________________________

CONVERSE - Your TNC enters Converse Mode when a Packet connection or AMTOR Link is established.

TRANS   - Your TNC enters Transparent Mode when a Packet connection or AMTOR Link is established.

________________________________________________________________________

CONMODE selects the mode your TNC uses after entering the CONNECTED Packet state, or Linked ARQ AMTOR state.

For most packet and AMTOR operation, setting CONMODE to CONVERS (default) is most natural.


Connect
  Connect   call1 [VIA call2[,call3...,call9]]

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Packet , PACTOR

  Host: CO

________________________________________________________________________

call1  -  Call sign of the distant station to which you wish to be connected.

call2  -  Optional call sign(s) of up to eight digipeaters via which you'll be -call9 repeated to reach the distant station.

________________________________________________________________________

Use the CONNECT command to send a Packet connect request to station "call1," directly or via one or more digipeaters (call2 through call9).  Each call sign can include an optional SSID "-n" immediately after the call sign.

In the HF or VHF packet windows in PC-Pakratt for Windows ,this is done with the [image] button on the tool bar.

The CONNECT command works on either Radio Port when the TNC is in the Packet mode. Make sure that the correct Radio Port has been selected with the CHSWITCH character as described in Chapter 4 of this manual.

The part of the command line shown in brackets below is optional, and is used only when connecting through one or more digipeaters. Type the digipeater fields in the exact sequence you wish to use to route your packets to destination station "call1."  (Don't type the brackets or quotation marks)

               VIA call2[, call3...,call9]

You can type the command CONNECT at any time to check the status.  If you are trying to connect to another station, you will see the message:

      Link state is: CONNECT in progress

If the distant station doesn't "ack" your connect request after the number of tries in RETRY, the CONNECT attempt is canceled. Your monitor displays:

     cmd:*** Retry count exceeded

*** DISCONNECTED: (call sign)

Node Connects:

When using PC-Pakratt for Windows the Connect dialog has a special "Node" connection feature that allows the program to connect to other stations through Net/ROM or <The>-<Net> nodes as described below.

To establish connect through multiple NET/ROM or <The-Net> compatible packet nodes, separate the node callsigns with a semicolon instead of a comma when entering the text into the Connect dialog box. To connect to N4PZM using first the MLB then the ORL nodes enter the following:

MLB;C ORL;C N4PZM

The connect Dialog will not return back to the operating screen until all connections have been made. If any of the connections fail, the Dialog will close. The Dialog will also show the progress of each connect in the path.

In PACTOR you may query the Connect command when in Dumb Terminal mode to check the station you are connected to.  In PACTOR you must use the PTCONN command to issue connects.


CONPerm
  CONPerm   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: CY

________________________________________________________________________

ON    -  The connection on the current channel is maintained.

OFF  -  The current channel can be disconnected from the other stations.

________________________________________________________________________

When ON, CONPERM forces the TNC to maintain the current connection, even when frames to the other station exceed RETRY attempts for an acknowledgment.  To enable CONPERM in PC-Pakratt for Windows press the [image] button in the Packet operating window.

Should power to the TNC fail, the unit will attempt to re-establish the connection if CONPERM is ON and the battery backup in the TNC is enabled.


CONStamp
  CONStamp   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet, AMTOR and PACTOR

  Host: CG

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    Connect status messages ARE time stamped.

OFF -    Connect status messages are NOT time stamped.

________________________________________________________________________

CONSTAMP activates time stamping of *** CONNECTED status messages.

If CONSTAMP is ON and DAYTIME, (the TNC's internal clock) is set, the time is sent with CONNECT and DISCONNECT messages.  For example, if the clock is set and CONSTAMP is ON, a connect and disconnect sequence appears as follows:

cmd:10:55:23  *** CONNECTED to KD4JP

cmd:10:55:59  *** DISCONNECTED: KD4JP


CONVerse
  CONVerse   ( K for short )

  Immediate Command

  Mode: All

  Host: Not Supported

________________________________________________________________________

CONVERSE is an immediate command that causes the TNC to switch from the Command Mode into the Converse Mode.  The letter "K" may also be used.

Once the TNC is in the Converse Mode, all characters typed from the keyboard are processed and transmitted by your radio. To return the TNC to the Command Mode, type the Command Mode entry character (default is <CTRL-C>).


CPactime
  CPactime   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: CI

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    Packet transmit timer IS used in Converse Mode.

OFF -    Packet transmit timer is NOT used in Converse Mode.

________________________________________________________________________

CPACTIME activates automatic, periodic packet transmission in the Converse Mode.

When CPACTIME is ON, characters are packetized and transmitted periodically as if in Transparent Mode.  Local keyboard editing and display features of the Converse Mode are available. See the PACTIME command for a discussion of how periodic packetizing works.


CRAdd
  CRAdd   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Baudot RTTY

  Host: CR

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    Send <CR CR LF> in Baudot RTTY.

OFF -    Send <CR LF> in Baudot RTTY (default).

________________________________________________________________________

The CRADD command permits you to set the TNC's "new line" sequence so that an additional carriage return is ADDed automatically at the end of a typed line.

When CRADD is ON the line-end sequence is <CR><CR><LF>.  When CRADD is OFF the line-end sequence is <CR><LF>.  The double carriage return is required in some RTTY services such as MARS.  CRADD has no effect on received data.


CStatus
  CStatus   [Short]

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Packet

  Host: Not Supported

________________________________________________________________________

CSTATUS is an immediate command helpful in multiple connections.

When CSTATUS is typed, your monitor displays Link State of all ten logical channels on Radio Port 1 (designated 0-9) and all 26 logical channels on Radio Port 2 (designated A-Z).  In the PK-232 MBX and the DSP-1232 only channels 0-9 are shown since radio port-2 is not simultaneous.  In the Dumb Terminal mode the display is as follows:

In the HF or VHF packet window, this information is shown with the MHEARD command when the [image] button is pressed.

NOT CONNECTED TO ANY STATION   CONNECTED TO TWO STATIONS

cmd:cs                      	cmd:cs

Ch. 0 - IO DISCONNECTED	Ch. 0 - IO CONNECTED to WX1AAA

Ch. 1 -    DISCONNECTED	Ch. 1 -    DISCONNECTED

Ch. 2 -    DISCONNECTED	Ch. 2 -    DISCONNECTED

Ch. 3 -    DISCONNECTED	Ch. 3 -    DISCONNECTED

Ch. 4 -    DISCONNECTED	Ch. 4 -    DISCONNECTED

Ch. 5 -    DISCONNECTED	Ch. 5 -    DISCONNECTED

Ch. 6 -    DISCONNECTED	Ch. 6 -    DISCONNECTED

Ch. 7 -    DISCONNECTED	Ch. 7 -    DISCONNECTED

Ch. 8 -    DISCONNECTED	Ch. 8 -    DISCONNECTED

Ch. 9 -    DISCONNECTED	Ch. 9 -    DISCONNECTED

Ch. A -    DISCONNECTED	Ch. A -    CONNECTED to WX7BBB

    .                        	.

    .                        	.

Ch. Z -    DISCONNECTED	Ch. Z -    DISCONNECTED

CSTATUS will give a short display if desired. CSTATUS SHORT (or CS S) displays only the current input/output channel or those channels which are connected.

This form of the command is useful to remind you which channel or Radio Port the TNC considers to be active. For example if you have a DSP-2232 or PK-900 and yesterday your last Packet Connect occurred on Radio Port 2, typing the CSTATUS Short command would show the following:

      Ch. A - IO DISCONNECTED

This means that if you want to send data to Radio Port 1, you must first select is with the CHSWITCH, character as described in Chapter 4 of the TNC  manual.


CText
  CText    text

  Default: empty

  Mode: Packet

  Host: CT

________________________________________________________________________

text   -   Any combination of characters up to a maximum of 120 characters.

________________________________________________________________________

CTEXT is the "automatic answer" text sent when CMSG is ON.  The message is sent only when another station connects to you. A typical CTEXT message might be:

"I'm not available right now. Please leave a message on my MailDrop."

Clear CTEXT with "%", "&", "NO", "NONE" or "OFF", or simply set CMSG OFF.

See MTEXT for a similar feature available for Packet MailDrop connections.


CWid
  CWid   "n"

  Default: $06 <CTRL-F>

  Mode: Baudot/ASCII RTTY, AMTOR, PACTOR and FAX

  Host: CW

________________________________________________________________________

The CWID command lets you change the "send CWID" control character typed at the end of your RTTY, AMTOR or PACTOR dialogue.

When the TNC reads this character embedded in the text or keyboard input, it switches modes and sends your call sign in Morse code, at the keying speed set by MSPEED. As soon as your call sign has been sent in Morse, the TNC turns off your transmitter and returns to receive and displays the command mode prompt "cmd:".


DAYStamp
  DAYStamp   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: All

  Host: DS

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   The DATE is included in CONSTAMP and MSTAMP displays.

OFF -   Only the TIME is included in CONSTAMP and MSTAMP displays.

________________________________________________________________________

DAYSTAMP activates the date in CONSTAMP, and MSTAMP. Set DAYSTAMP ON when you want a dated record of packet channel activity, or when you're unavailable for local packet operation.

PC-Pakratt for Windows sets the TNC time depending on the state of the UTC time flag. in the TNC Configuration. Whenever this flag is changed, the TNC's time is also changed.


DAytime
  DAytime   date & time

  Default: none

  Mode: All

  Host: DA

________________________________________________________________________

date & time -  Current DATE and TIME to set.

________________________________________________________________________

DAYTIME sets the TNC's internal clock current date and time. The date & time is used in many modes and should be set when the TNC is powered up.

The clock is not set when the TNC is turned on.  The DAYTIME command displays the "?clock not set" error message until it is set as follows:

 yymmddhhmm[ss]   (spaces and punctuation are allowed)

Example:  cmd:daytime 9108090659

where:

yy is the last two digits of the year

mm is the two-digit month code (01-12)

dd is date (01-31)

hh is the hour (00-23)

mm is the minutes after the hour (00-59)

[ss] is the optional seconds

Optionally the flollowing types of Dallas Semiconductor "Smart Watch" chips may be used to hold the date and time when power is off.

RAM-type SmartWatch chips are used on the 62256 RAM residing at the highest address:

o Use the DS1216C in U5 RAM on the PK-232 MBX daughter board.

o Use the DS1216C in the RAM on the PK-88.

o Use the DS1216C in U7 RAM on the DSP-1232 and DSP2232.

o Use the DS1216C in U39 (high RAM) on the PK-900

ROM-type SmartWatch chips are used on the 27512 or 27010 EPROM residing at the highest or middle address:

o Use the DS1216E in U3 RAM on the PK-232 MBX daughter board.

o Use the DS1216E and DS1216F in U3 on the DSP1232 and DSP2232.

o Use the DS1216E and DS1216F in U37 RAM on the PK-900.

o The DS1216E and DS1216F can not be used on the PK-88.

Setting DAYTIME sets the time of day into any SmartWatch present in the system. The only time the SmartWatch is read is on power-up or RESTART or RESET.

PPWIN automatically uses the DAYTIME command to set the TNC's time to your computer's time.


DCdconn
  DCdconn   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet, AMTOR, PACTOR, KISS and RAWHDLC

  Host: DC

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   RS-232 cable Pin 8 follows the state of the CON (or DCD) LED.

OFF -   RS-232 cable Pin 8 is permanently set high (default).

________________________________________________________________________

DCDCONN defines how the DCD (Data Carrier Detect) signal affects pin 8 in the RS-232 interface to your computer or terminal. Some programs such as PBBS software require that DCDCONN be ON.

DCDCONN also works in the RAWHDLC and KISS Modes. In RAWHDLC and KISS Modes, no packet connections are known to the TNC. When DCDCONN is ON, the state of the radio DCD is sent to the RS-232 DCD pin (pin-8). This may be necessary to some host applications that need to know when the radio channel is busy.


DELete
  DELete   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: All

  Host: DL

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   The <DELETE> ($7F) key is used for editing your typing.

OFF -   The <BACKSPACE> ($08) key is used for editing your typing.

________________________________________________________________________

Use the DELETE command to select the key to use for deleting while editing.

Set DELETE OFF (default) if you wish to use the <Backspace> key to edit typing mistakes.  Set DELETE ON if you wish to use the <Delete> key to edit mistakes.

See the BKONDEL command controls how the TNC indicates deletion.


DFrom
  DFrom   all, none, yes/no call1[,call2..]  / all, none, yes/no call1[,call2..]

  Default: all/all

  Mode: Packet

  Host: DF

________________________________________________________________________

call   -  all, none, YES list, NO list.  list of up to eight call signs, separated by commas.

________________________________________________________________________

DFROM determines how each Radio Port of your TNC responds to stations trying to use your station as a digipeater. DFROM is set to "all/all" when you first start your TNC. Type DFROM to display the ALL/NONE/YES_list/NO_list status of station's call signs whose packets will or will not be repeated.

To prevent all stations from digipeating through Radio Port 1 of your station, type DFROM NONE.

To permit one or more specific stations to digipeat through Radio Port 2 of your station, type DFROM /YES (followed by a list of calls signs). Packets will be digipeated only from stations whose call signs are listed.

To prevent one or more specific stations to digipeat through your station (DSP Radio Port 1), type DFROM NO (followed by a list of call signs).  Packets will not be digipeated from stations whose call signs are listed.

Clear DFROM with "%" "&" or "OFF" as arguments, or type DFROM ALL/ALL.


DIDdle
  DIDdle:   ON|OFF

  Default: ON

  Mode: Baudot, ASCII

  Host: DD

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   In Baudot, the TNC will send the LTRS character when idling.  In ASCII, the TNC sends the NULL (00) character.

OFF  -  No characters are sent when idling in transmit.

________________________________________________________________________

In RTTY modes, it may be desirable to continue sending data while paused at the keyboard. With DIDDLE on, the TNC sends idle characters when waiting for keyboard entry.


DIRect
 DIRect   "m n"

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Packet

  Host: DQ

________________________________________________________________________

DIRECT is an immediate command that displays a directory listing of all available TNC Modems in a PK-900 or DSP data controller. When the DIRECT command is given, the MODEM list is displayed as shown below:

The DIRECT command can also take a modem number as an argument to display only the information on that particular modem including the argument of 0 which displays only the date of the modem EPROM. A range of arguments can also be

entered, for example DIRECT 1 9 will display the directory of all the RTTY/TOR modems contain in the DSP MODEM EPROM.

PK-900 modem directory:

  - Port 1 -                             	- Port 2 -

 1: FSK 45 bps 170: 2125/2295     1: Internal 200: 1070/1270

 2: FSK 100 bps 170: 2125/2295    2: Internal 200: 2025/2225

 3: FSK 45 bps 200: 2110/2310     3: Internal 1000: 1200/2200

 4: FSK 100 bps 200: 2110/2310    4: Internal 1000: 1200/2200 eq.

 5: FSK 100 bps 425: 2125/2550    5: Internal 200: 1180/980

 6: FSK 100 bps 850: 2125/2975    6: Internal 200: 1850/1650

 7: FSK 100 bps 850: 1275/2125    7: Internal 800: 2100/1300

 8: Analog 900/2500               8: Internal 800: 2100/1300 eq.

 9: FSK 2400 bps 800: 1300/2100   9: Internal option

10: FSK 300 bps 200: 2110/2310    10: Modem disconnect header

11: FSK 1200 bps 1000: 1200/2200  12: Morse 750

DSP-2232 modem directory:

  (930315)

  1: RTTY/TOR 170: 2125/2295 	 	2: RTTY/TOR 170: 1445/1275

  3: RTTY/TOR 425: 2125/2550 	 	4: RTTY/TOR 850: 2125/2975

  5: RTTY/TOR 200: PACTOR 2110/2310	 6: RTTY/TOR 200: PACTOR 1460/1260

 10: p1 Packet 300 bps HF 2110/2310	11: p1 Packet 300 bps HF 1460/1260

 12: p1 Packet 1200 bps VHF         	13: p1 Packet 1200 bps PACSAT

 14: p1 Packet 1200 bps PSK    	15: p1 Packet 2400 bps V.26B

 16: p1 Packet 4800 bps PACSAT   	17: p1 Packet 4800 bps PSK

 18: p1 Packet 9600 bps FSK K9NG/G3RUH 	20: p2 Packet 300 bps HF 2110/2310

 22: p2 Packet 1200 bps VHF            	23: p2 Packet 1200 bps PACSAT

 25: p2 Packet 2400 bps V.26B          	28: p2 Packet 9600 bps FSK K9NG/G3RUH

 30: RTTY/TOR 170: 2125/2295; p2 Packet 300 bps HF 2110/2310

 31: RTTY/TOR 170: 2125/2295; p2 Packet 1200 bps VHF

 32: RTTY/TOR 200:PACTOR 2110/2310; p2 Packet 300 bps HF 2110/2310

 33: p1 Packet 300 bps HF 2110/2310; p2 Packet 1200 bps VHF

 34: RTTY/TOR 200:PACTOR 2110/2310; p2 Packet 1200 bps VHF

 35: p1 Packet 1200 bps VHF; p2 Packet 1200 bps VHF

 40: Morse 750 Hz                      	41: Analog FAX HF

 42: Analog FAX APT                    	43: Analog SSTV

 44: DSP data 400 bps OSCAR-13         	45: RTTY/TOR 1200 bps ASCII OSCAR-11

 46: DSP data Spectrum                 	50: p1 Packet 1200 bps MSK

 51: p1 Packet 2400 bps MSK            	60: p2 Packet 1200 bps MSK

 61: p2 Packet 2400 bps MSK


  Disconne

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Packet

  Host: DI

_______________________________________________________________________

DISCONNE is an immediate command that initiates a disconnect command to the distant station to which you are connected. The DISCONNE command acts on the Radio Port and logical channel that is presently selected.  In PC-Pakratt for Windows press the [image] button to start the Disconnect process on the current radio port and logical channel.

 See the discussion on switching between logical channels and Radio Ports in you TNC Manual.

If your disconnect command is successful, your monitor will display:

          *** DISCONNECTED: (call sign)

Other commands can be entered while a disconnect is in progress.  New connections are not allowed until the disconnect is completed.

o    If another disconnect command is entered while your TNC is trying to disconnect, your TNC will instantly switch to the disconnected state.


DISPlay
  DISPlay   [class]

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Command

  Host: Not Supported

________________________________________________________________________

class -   Optional parameter identifier, one of the following:

 (A)sync     display asynchronous port parameters

 (B)BS       display AMTOR and Packet MailDrop parameters

 (C)haracter display special characters

 (F)ax       display Facsimile parameters

 (I)d        display ID parameters

 (L)ink      display link parameters

 (M)onitor   display monitor parameters

 (Q)Modem    display MODEM default parameters

 (R)TTY      display RTTY parameters

 (S)tep      display Step parameters

 (T)iming    display timing parameters

 (Z)         display the entire command/parameter list

_____________________________________________________________

DISPLAY is an immediate command. When DISPLAY is typed without a parameter, the TNC responds with a short list of often used parameters.

        (See also DISPLAY A,B,C,F,I,L,M,R,T,Z)

          Connect   Link state is: DISCONNECTED

          Opmode    PAcket

          FRack     5/5 (5 sec.)

          HBaud     1200/1200

          MAXframe  4/4

          Monitor   4/4 (UA DM C D I UI)

          MYcall    DSP/DSP

          MYSelcal  none

          PACLen    128/128

          RBaud     45

          TXdelay   30/30 (300 msec.)

          Vhf       ON/ON

You can display subgroups of related parameters by specifying the optional class parameter. For example, to display the MailDrop parameters type:

  disp b

  3Rdparty  OFF

  FREe      16996

  KILONFWD  ON

  LAstmsg   0

  MAildrop  OFF

  MDMon     OFF

  MDPrompt  Subject:/Enter message, ^Z (CTRL-Z) or /EX to end

  MMsg      OFF

  MTExt     Welcome to my AEA TNC maildrop.

  Type H for help.

  MYMail    none

  TMail     OFF

  TMPrompt  GA subj/GA msg, '/EX' to end.

Command names are shown with UPPER-CASE letters indicating the minimum number of characters required for the command. The lower-case letters indicate the (optional) rest of the command name.


  DSPdata

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Command

  Host: DP

________________________________________________________________________

DSPDATA is an immediate that places the DSP-1232 or Radio Port 1 of the DSP-2232 into the DSP DATA mode. When the DSPDATA mode is entered, the modem in QDATA is loaded.  In this mode, a host computer program may communicate directly with the Motorola 56001. In this mode, the TNC is functionally only a modem. All protocol conversion or translation of the data must be done by the host computer program.  When in the DSP DATA mode there may be so much data flowing between the processors that Packet operation Radio Port 2 must be disabled.

The DSP DATA mode is not a mode most users will ever need to use directly. Rather it allows programmers to use the Modems in the TNC for their own applications.


DWait
  DWait   "n/n"

  Default: 16/16(160 msec.)

  Mode: Packet

  Host: DW

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 250 specifies wait time in ten-millisecond intervals.

________________________________________________________________________

Unless the TNC is waiting to transmit digipeated packets, DWAIT forces your TNC to pause DWAIT x 10 mSec after last hearing data on the channel, before it begins its transmitter key-up sequence. DWAIT may be set for each Radio Port of the TNC.

DWAIT is an older way collisions with digipeated packets were avoided. These days the P-PERSISTENT method is generally used. When the PPERSIST command is ON (default) the DWAIT timer is ignored.


EAS
  EAS   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Baudot, ASCII, AMTOR, PACTOR and MORSE

  Host: EA

________________________________________________________________________

ON    -   Echo characters when actually sent on the air by the TNC.

OFF  -   Echo characters when sent to the TNC by the computer.

________________________________________________________________________

The ECHO-AS-SENT (EAS) command functions in all modes except packet. EAS lets you to choose the way data is displayed on your monitor screen or printer.

To display your typing exactly as you are typing the keyboard characters or sending from a disk file, set EAS "OFF" (default). To see the actual data being sent from your TNC to your radio and transmitted on the air, set EAS "ON".

When EAS is ON in Morse and Baudot RTTY, you'll see only UPPER CASE characters on your screen - the data actually transmitted to the distant station.

When EAS is ON in AMTOR Mode A (ARQ), you'll see characters echoed on your screen only after the distant station has validated (Ack'd) your block of three characters. For Packet the MXMIT command should be used.

Nulls ($00) are not echoed, including the nulls produced by DIDDLE ON in ASCII.


Echo
  Echo   ON|OFF

  Default: ON

  Mode: All

  Host: EC

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   Characters received from the terminal ARE echoed by the TNC.

OFF  -  Characters are NOT echoed.

________________________________________________________________________

The ECHO command controls local echoing by the TNC when in Command or Converse Mode. Local echoing is disabled in Transparent Mode.

o    Set ECHO ON (default) if you don't see your typing appear on your

display.

o    Set ECHO OFF if you see each character you type doubled.

ECHO is set correctly when you see the characters you type displayed correctly.

PPWIN turns ECHO ON. ECHO can be accessed through the Dumb Terminal Mode. PPWIN will set ECHO ON when leaving the Dumb Terminal Mode.


ERrchar
  ERrchar   "n"

  Default: $5F (_)

  Mode: AMTOR, PACTOR, Morse, NAVTEX and TDM

  Host: ER

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    A hexadecimal value from $00-$7F used to denote the error character used by the TNC for Morse, ARQ, FEC, NAVTEX and TDM.

________________________________________________________________________

n is a hex value $00-7F, default $5F (underscore).  This is the character that the TNC displays when it receives a mutilated character in Morse, ARQ, FEC, PACTOR,  NAVTEX or TDM. The user may wish to set this character to $2A (asterisk), $07 (bell), $20 (space) or $00 (null). ERRCHAR ON or ER Y restores the default.


EScape
  EScape   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: All

  Host: ES

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   The <ESCAPE> character ($1B) is output as "$" ($24).

OFF -   The <ESCAPE> character is output as <ESCAPE> ($1B) (default).

________________________________________________________________________

The ESCAPE command selects the character to be output when an <ESCAPE> character is to be sent to the terminal. The ESCAPE character selection is provided because some computers and terminals interpret the <ESCAPE> character as a special command.  Set ESCAPE ON if you have an <ESCAPE> sensitive terminal to avoid unexpected results from accidentally receiving this character.


EXPert
 EXPert  ON|OFF

 Default: OFF

 Mode: All

 Host: Ex

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   Enables all data controller commands in verbose mode.

OFF -   Disables some of the less frequently used data commands in verbose mode.

________________________________________________________________________

The EXPERT command controls the user's access to the data controller's command set. Because some customers find the large number of available commands confusing, this release  (Nov 1993) limits the first time user's access to the commands that are the simplest or most often used. Generally, about half of the total number of commands are available to the user after a RESET (EXPERT OFF).

If EXPERT is OFF (default), the expert commands may not be accessed and do not appear in any output of the DISPLAY command. An attempt to use one of these commands results in the error "?EXPERT command."

To gain access to the expert commands, the user must type "EXPERT ON."

In Host mode, all commands are available regardless of the setting of EXPERT. This command will not affect operation of AEA Pakratt programs.


 FAx

 Immediate Command

 Mode: Command

 Host: FA

________________________________________________________________________

FAX is an immediate command that switches Radio Port 1 of your TNC into the facsimile mode.  The FAX mode is available only if the MailDrop (or FREE command) shows at least 3742 bytes free. You must kill MailDrop messages until the number reaches this level if you wish to operate FAX.

When the TNC is in the FAX mode, Packet operation on Radio Port 2 is disabled. Facsimile transmissions contain so much data, that there is simply not enough time to handle Packet while facsimile data is being transmitted or received.


FAXNeg
  FAXNeg   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode:  FAX

  Host: FN

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    The white and black senses are reversed

OFF -    The white and black senses are normal

________________________________________________________________________

One might use FAXNEG ON when receiving an image consisting mostly of black, as in a satellite photo.  In this case it might help to save your printer ribbon, as well as accentuating features such as cloud cover.

FAXNEG ON is NOT the same as RXREV ON. RXREV reverses the entire signal, including the sync pulses.  FAXNEG keeps the sync pulses so that they can be recognized, but reverses the image data.


  FEc

  Immediate Command

  Mode: AMTOR Mode B

  Host: FE

________________________________________________________________________

FEC is an immediate command that starts an AMTOR FEC (Mode B) transmission on Radio Port 1 of the TNC.  Use FEC for CQ calls in AMTOR.  Be sure to include your SELCALL (MYSELCAL) and MYIDENT code in your CQ message so that the distant station can call you back in ARQ.

In PC-Pakratt for windows, press the [image] button to start an FEC AMTOR transmission.

FEC is necessary for all round table AMTOR contacts.  When operating in FEC, let your TNC begin each transmission with three to five seconds of idling. The RTTY practice of transmitting a line of RYRYRY is unnecessary on FEC.

You can signify the end of your FEC transmission by typing the changeover sign "+?," internationally recognized as the RTTY equivalent of "KKK."  However, in FEC, "+?" is not a software command. You still have to un-key your transmitter (with the RECEIVE or CWID characters or the RCVE command) as you would in RTTY.


Flow
  Flow   ON|OFF

  Default: ON

  Mode: All

  Host: FL

________________________________________________________________________

ON    -    Type-in flow control IS active.

OFF  -    Type-in flow control is NOT active.

________________________________________________________________________________

This command only operated in Dumb Terminal Mode.  When FLOW is ON (default), any character typed on your keyboard in Dumb terminal Mode causes output from the TNC to the terminal to stop until any of the following occurs:

o    A packet is sent on either Port (in Converse Mode)

o    A line is completed (in Command Mode)

o    The packet length on either Port (See PACLEN) is exceeded

o    The current packet or command line is canceled

o    The redisplay-line character is typed

o    The logical packet channel or Radio Port is changed

Setting FLOW ON prevents received data from interfering with your keyboard data entry.  When FLOW is OFF, data is sent to the terminal whenever it is available.


FRack
 FRack   "n/n"

  Default: 5/5 (5 sec.)

  Mode: Packet

  Host: FR

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    1 to 15, specifying FRame ACKnowledgment time-out in 1 sec. intervals.

________________________________________________________________________

FRACK is the FRame Acknowledgment time in seconds that your TNC will wait for acknowledgment of a sent protocol frame before "retrying" that frame.  FRACK may be different for each DSP Radio Port. A setting of 8 is recommended for HF packet operation.

After sending a packet requiring acknowledgment, the TNC waits for FRACK seconds before incrementing the retry counter and sending another frame. If the packet address includes any digipeaters, the time between retries is adjusted to:

     Retry interval (in seconds) = "n" x (2 x m + 1)

   (where m is the number of intermediate relay stations.)

When a packet is retried, a random wait time is added to any other wait times. This avoids lockups where two packet stations repeatedly collide with each other.

See also FRICK.


  FREe

  Immediate Command

  Mode: All

  Host: FZ

________________________________________________________________________

Typing "FREE" displays the number of usable bytes left in the MailDrop, as in "FREE 16996." This may be useful to a Host mode application using the MailDrop. The FAX mode is only available only if the FREE command shows at least 3742 bytes free. You must kill MailDrop messages until the number reaches this level if you wish to operate FAX.

In PC-Pakratt for Windows, this is done with the <Ctrl-[F6]> command.


FRIck
  FRIck   "n/n"

  Default: 0/0 (0 sec.)

  Mode: Packet

  Host: FF

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    0 to 250, specifying the Frame Acknowledgment time-out for Meteor Scatter work in 10 mSecond intervals.

________________________________________________________________________

FRICK is a short version of FRACK, meant to be used in packet radio meteor scatter work. If FRICK is 0 (default), the FRACK timer is then in use and the unit operates as before, with the retry timer in units of whole seconds. If FRICK is 1 to 250, FRICK overrides FRACK as the unit's retry timer, and the retry timer is in units of 10 msec. up to 2500 msec. (2.5 seconds).

Unlike FRACK, FRICK does not take into account the number of digipeaters in the connect path. FRICK assumes there are no digipeaters being used.

Note: Do not operate the unit with multiple packet connections while FRICK is active (1-250). In contrast to FRACK, which provides one retry timer per multi-connect channel, there is only one FRICK timer for each radio port in the TNC. Each logical channel will try to use the same FRICK timer, causing interference to the operation of the other channels.

Due to the sporadic nature of meteor scatter work, a Master/Slave mode can be enabled in the TNC with User BIT 18 (UBIT 18). When UBIT 18 OFF, Frame Acknowledge operation is as in previous firmware versions.

When UBIT 18 is ON, a master/slave relationship is established in packet radio connections. This is done to reduce the possibility of simultaneous transmissions by both sides of a packet connection.  In this mode, the master station sends either an I-frame or a polling frame upon the expiration of FRICK (or FRACK if FRICK = 0).

The FRICK or FRACK timer then starts counting again.  The master station therefore sends packets constantly, even if all its I-frames have been acknowledged.  The slave station sends nothing, not even I-frames, until it receives a polling frame from the master.  A station becomes the master upon its transmission of a SABM (connect) frame; a station becomes the slave upon its transmission of a UA (acknowledgment of the SABM) frame.

Recommended settings for this method of meteor scatter work (both stations should use these settings):

          UBIT 18 ON

     RETRY 0

     AX25L2V2 ON  (default)

     MAXFRAME 1

     (CHECK doesn't matter)

     FRICK n,

where n is large enough to allow the other station time to send the start of an acknowledgment frame

Note:  This is an experimental mode and we welcome any comments or suggestions you might have.  Please make them in writing and direct them to the AEA Engineering Department.  Thank You.


FSpeed
  FSpeed   "n"

  Default: 2 (120)

  Mode:  FAX

  Host: FS

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    0 to 4 selects the FAX horizontal scan rate from the table below:

________________________________________________________________________

1:       1 line/Second        60 lines/Minute

2:       2 lines/Second      120 lines/Minute

3:       3 lines/Second      180 lines/Minute

4:       4 lines/Second      240 lines/Minute

0:     1.5 lines/Second       90 lines/Minute

You can tell the scan rate by listening to the signal.  Most weather charts are transmitted at 2 lines/Second (default), or 120 lines/Minute. Some facsimile photographs and Japanese news is sent at 60 lines/minute.

With wide-carriage printers, the maximum print densities are reduced. Here are the maximum print densities at various scan speeds and carriage widths:

 FSPEED (LPM)   Standard carriage    Wide carriage

   0	 90      183 dpi	     113 dpi

   1	 60      275 dpi	     169 dpi

   2	120      138 dpi	      85 dpi

   3	180	  92 dpi	      56 dpi

   4	240	  69 dpi	      42 dpi


FUlldup
  FUlldup   ON|OFF/ON|OFF

  Default: OFF/OFF

   Mode: Packet

  Host: FU

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    Full duplex mode is ENABLED.

OFF -    Full duplex mode is DISABLED.

________________________________________________________________________

When full-duplex mode is OFF (default), the TNC makes use of the DCD (Data Carrier Detect) signal from its modem to avoid collisions. FULLDUP may be set independently for each Radio Port.

When full-duplex mode is ON the TNC ignores the DCD signal and acknowledges packets individually.

Full-duplex operation is useful for full-duplex radio operation, such as through OSCAR satellites. It should not be used unless both your station and the distant station can operate in full-duplex.


GRaphics
  GRaphics   "n"

  Default: 1 (960 dots)

  Mode:  FAX

  Host: GR

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    0 to 6 selects the FAX horizontal graphics dot density printed on the printer from the table below

________________________________________________________________________

GRAPHICS determines the horizontal print density of the parallel Printer.

The GRAPHICS dot densities for each PRTYPE will be given with the PRTYPE command. Graphics dot-densities as a function of PRTYPE are shown below.

Density in dots/inch (dpi) as a function of GRAPHICS and PRTYPE

                                GRAPHICS

PRTYPE	0	1	2	3	4	5	6

0-3	60	120	120	240	80	72	90

4-7	60	120	120	240	80	72	90

8-9	60	120	144	200	80	72	90

12-19	136	240	144	160	80	72	96

20-21	60	 60	 60	 60	60	72     100

24-27	60	120	144	240	60	72       .

28-29	60	120	   .	   .	  .	  .	 .

32-35	60	120	120	240	80	72	90

36	60	 60	 60	 60	60	60	60

40-43	60	120	120	120	60	72     144

44-47	72	144	144	 72	72	72	72

48-51	80	160	 80	 80	80	80	80

In using the various GRAPHICS densities above, the user should be aware that not all the combinations or parameters work, especially with the slower printers (100 CPS or less). For example, a combination of PRTYPE 2, FSPEED 4, GRAPHICS 1 and ASPECT 4 would require the printer to print a pattern of 8 dots by 960 every 3 seconds which would mean trouble for a 100 CPS printer.  On the other hand, a combination of PRTYPE 2, FSPEED 2, GRAPHICS 0 and ASPECT 2 would work, as it results in a pattern of dots 8 by 480 every 12 seconds. We know the following combinations of dot densities and FSPEED cause trouble.

FSPEED, 8" Width            FSPEED 13" Width

   0    1    2    3    4    0    1    2    3    4

60   dpi

72   dpi                                                s

80   dpi                                                x

90   dpi                                                x

96   dpi                                           s    x

100  dpi                                           s    x

120  dpi                     s                     x    x

136  dpi                     x                     x    x

144  dpi                     x                 s   x    x

160  dpi                s    x      x    x    x    x    x

200  dpi                x    x      x    x    x    x    x

240  dpi          s     x    x      x    x    x    x    x


GUsers
GUsers   "n"

  Default: 0

  Mode: Packet, AMTOR, PACTOR

  Host: GU

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    0 to 3 specifies the maximum number of users allowed on the gateway.

________________________________________________________________________

GUSERS  allows up to "n" number of stations to connect to the callsign in MYGATE for gateway operation. The argument "n" may be 0-3, with a default 0 meaning no other stations my use your station as a gateway. Alternatively, n can be thought of as the maximum number of pairs of stations which may be connected through the Gateway.

GUSERS must be set to a number above 0 in order to allow others to use your station as a gateway.


HBaud
  HBaud   "n/n"

  Default: 1200/0 bauds

  Mode: Packet

  Host: HB

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    values specifying the Packet data rate in bits per second from each Radio Port of the TNC to the radio.

________________________________________________________________________

HBAUD sets the radio ("on-air") baud rate only in the Packet operating mode for each Radio Port. The default is 1200 bits/sec (VHF) for Radio Port 1 and 0 (disabled) on Radio Port 2.

In the case of the DSP data controllers, HBAUD is tied to the MODEM  that is selected and is a read only command.

In PC-Pakratt for Windows, HBAUD is set in the tool bar of the HF or VHF packet windows in the [image] box.

This value is saved in the Save Parameters commands in the File menu.

HBAUD has no relationship to the baud rate selected in the Configuration TNC menu.

Available HDLC packet data rates "n" include 45, 50, 57, 75, 100, 110, 150, 200, 300, 400, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 and 9600 bauds.  Note that only modems in the DSP data controllers and the PK-900 with the optional internal modem support data rates higher than 1200 baud.


HEAderln
  HEAderln   ON|OFF

  Default: ON

  Mode: Packet

  Host: HD

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   The header in a monitored packet is printed on a separate line from the text.

OFF -   The header and text of monitored packets are printed on the same line.

________________________________________________________________________

When HEADERLN is ON (default), the address is shown, followed by a <CR><LF> that puts the packet text on a separate line as shown below:

     WX1AAA>WX2BBB:

   Go ahead and transfer the file.

HEADERLN affects the display of monitored packets.  When HEADERLN is OFF, the address information is shown on the same line as the packet text as shown below:

     WX1AAA>WX2BBB: Go ahead and transfer the file.


HEReis
  HEReis   "n"

  Default: $02 <CTRL-B>

  Mode: Baudot, ASCII, AMTOR and PACTOR

  Host: HR

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -   Is the hex representation ($01-$7F) of the character that causes the AAB string to be sent in the middle of transmitted text.

______________________________________________________

If you wish to send you own AAB, string for identification during a transmission simply enter the HEREIS character (default <CTRL-B>).


HId
  HId   ON|OFF/ON|OFF

  Default: OFF/OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: HI

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    Your TNC sends HDLC identification as a digipeater.

OFF -    Your TNC does not send HDLC identification.

________________________________________________________________________

Set HID ON to force your TNC to send an ID packet every 9.5 minutes when it's being used as a digipeater.  Otherwise leave HID OFF (default).

HID is settable for either Radio Port on the TNC since it is not likely both ports will  be performing the digipeater function.

This identification consists of a UI-frame with your station identification (MYCALL) and MYALIAS in the data field. The packet is addressed to "ID".

NOTE:  You cannot change the 9.5-minute automatic interval timing.


HOMebbs
  HOMebbs   call

  Default: (none)

  Mode: Packet/MailDrop

  Host: HM

________________________________________________________________________

call  -    Call Sign of your HOME BBS with which you have made prior arrangements to Auto-Forward.

________________________________________________________________________

This is the Call Sign of your local or HOME BBS that you will use for Reverse Forwarding messages from your MailDrop.  You must make special arrangements with the system operator of this BBS to set you up for Reverse Forwarding.  The SSID is not compared when matching HOMEBBS to the source call sign of an incoming packet.


  Id

  Immediate Command

  Mode: AMTOR/ASCII/Baudot/Packet

  Host: ID

________________________________________________________________________

In AMTOR, the ID command acts like the RCVE command, only adding a Morse ID before going back to receive.  In ASCII and Baudot, the ID command causes a CW ID to be sent much like an immediate version of the CWID character (CTRL-F). Because the ID command is immediate, the message "Transmit Data Remaining" will be displayed if any un-sent data remains in the transmit buffer.

Press the [image] button in the operating window tool bar to issue the ID command.

In Packet, ID is an immediate command that sends a special identification packet. The ID command allows you to send a final identification packet when you're taking your station off the air. HID must also be set ON or no ID will be sent.

The identification consists of a UI-frame, with its data field containing your MYALIAS (if any) and your MYCALL and the word "digipeater". The ID packet is sent only if your TNC has digipeated any transmissions since the last automatic identification.


ILfpack
  ILfpack   ON|OFF

  Default: ON

  Mode: Packet

  Host: IL

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   The TNC ignores line-feed characters received from the terminal.

OFF  -  The TNC transmits all line-feeds received from the terminal.

________________________________________________________________________

The ILFPACK command permits you to control the way the TNC handles line- feed characters received from your computer or terminal while in the Packet mode.


JUstify
  JUstify    "n"

  Immediate Command

  Mode:  FAX

  Host: JU

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -   0 to 25 specifies the number of half-inches the facsimile image will  be moved closer to the edge of the paper.

________________________________________________________________________

The number 0-25 is in units of half-inches, or 1/16 of standard (8") paper width. In most cases entering JUSTIFY n will move the image to the left. If LEFTRITE is OFF, then JUSTIFY will move the image to the right.

For example if the left-hand edge of the image is 4-1/2 inches away from the edge of the paper, try entering JUSTIFY 8. This will move the image 4 inches to the left.  If this is not enough, you can always enter JUSTIFY 1, which will move the image the additional half-inch to the left.

JUSTIFY should only be needed after a manual start has been issued with the LOCK command in the FAX mode.


KILONFWD
  KILONFWD   ON|OFF

  Default: ON

  Mode: Packet/MailDrop

  Host: KL

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   The TNC kills messages after they have been Reverse Forwarded.

OFF -   The TNC does not kill messages after Reverse

Forwarding.

________________________________________________________________________

Controls the disposition of a message that has been Reverse Forwarded to the station whose call is in HOMEBBS. If KILONFWD is ON (default), the message is killed automatically to make room for other messages.  If KILONFWD is OFF, the message's status is changed from "F" to "Y."


KIss
  KIss   "n"

  Default: 0

  Mode: Packet

  Host: KI

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -   Is a HEX number from $00 (KISS disabled) through $FF that enables the KISS mode selected from the table below.

________________________________________________________________________

The KISS mode is entered to prepare the TNC for KISS operation.  PC-Pakratt for Windows will not run when the KISS mode is entered.

TCP/IP and other special applications have been written that require the KISS mode be enabled to operate correctly.  For normal AX.25 Packet operation, this command should be left at 0 or OFF (default).

When KISS operation is enabled, the TNC no longer operates in any other modes on either Radio Port.  The KISS command, takes a numerical argument from $00 - $FF.

The table below describes available KISS options.

KISS $00: KISS disabled (formerly displayed as KISS OFF)

KISS $01: Standard KISS (same as KISS ON or KISS YES)

KISS $03: Extended KISS

KISS $07: Extended KISS + KISS polling enabled

KISS $0B: Extended KISS + KISS checksum enabled

KISS $0F: Extended KISS + KISS polling and checksum enabled

Note that KISS ON enables standard KISS operation for compatibility with existing applications.

Extended KISS mode adds these commands to the standard commands ($x0-$x5):

$xC signifies data to be transmitted.  Unlike the $x0 command, the $xC byte is followed by two frame ID bytes, then the data; when the TNC transmits the frame, it notifies the host application by echoing back FEND, the $xC byte, the two frame ID bytes, and FEND.

$xE is the polling command, similar to the HOST "GG" command existing in AEA products.  Polling makes multi-TNC KISS operation possible.  If KISS polling is enabled, the TNC holds received data until the host application sends the poll command.  If the TNC is holding no data, it echoes back  FEND $xE FEND.  The "x" in "$xE" must match the number in the KISSADDR command for the TNC to respond.

If KISS checksum is enabled, a checksum byte is added to the end (before the final FEND) of all KISS blocks flowing between the TNC and the host application.  The checksum is the exclusive-OR of all other bytes between the FEND bytes, taken before KISS escape transpositions.  A checksum is helpful when using multiple TNCs on a marginal RS-232 link.  If the TNC receives a KISS block with a bad checksum, it does not transmit the data.

In KISS and Raw HDLC modes, communication activity on the RS-232 link is shown by illuminating the STA and CON LEDs as follows:

Host to TNC Communication:  STA LED illuminated.

TNC to host Communication:  CON LED illuminated.

HOST OFF (3 <CTRL-C>s) will force KISS OFF.  Details on the use of KISS TNC protocol are contained in AEA's Technical Manual for the PK-232.


KISSAddr
  KISSAddr   "n"

  Default: 0

  Mode: Packet

  Host: KA

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -   Is a number from 0 - 15 signifying the KISS address of the TNC's radio port.

________________________________________________________________________

Radio port addressing is available in the high nibble of the KISS command byte.  The TNC compares the high nibble of the KISS command byte to KISSADDR only if extended KISS mode is enabled.  If the command does not match KISSADDR, the TNC takes no action.  Exception: the exit-KISS command $FF works no matter what the value of KISSADDR or the status of extended KISS mode.


LAstmsg
  LAstmsg   "n"

  Immediate Command

  Mode:  Packet, AMTOR and PACTOR MailDrop

  Host: LA

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    0 to 999 specifies the message number of the last MailDrop message.

________________________________________________________________________

The number 0-999 is the number of the last message sent by a remote user or the SYSOP to the MailDrop.  This command is handy for checking the last message sent to your MailDrop system. The LASTMSG command also allows the MailDrop message counter to be set to any value, or simply reset by setting LASTMSG 0.


LEftrite
  LEftrite   ON|OFF

  Default: ON

  Mode:  FAX

  Host: LR

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    The FAX signal is scanned from left to right

OFF -    The FAX signal is scanned from right to left ________________________________________________________________________

Occasionally you may come across FAX images that are obviously backwards. Turning LEFTRITE OFF will reverse the scanning direction.


LIte
  LIte   ON|OFF/ON|OFF

  Default: OFF/OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: LI

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   The TNC will attempt to use the HF Packet Lite extensions.

OFF -   The TNC uses AX.25 Level 2 Version 1.0 or 2.0 protocol.

________________________________________________________________________

Enables AEA's Packet Lite HF extensions to the AX.25 packet protocol.  To enable the Packet LITE protocol in HF Packet, press the [image] button on the HF Packet operating window tool bar.

A Packet Lite connection is established only if both stations have LITE ON.

As with the AX25L2V2 command, LITE may not be changed if the TNC is in a  connected state.  Setting LITE ON overrides the AX25L2V2 setting, and the unit

acts as if AX25L2V2 were ON.

See the section of the Packet Chapter (Chapter 4 of your TNC Manual) regarding Packet Lite operation and restrictions.


  Lock

  Immediate Command

  Mode:  Morse/Baudot/AMTOR/FAX

  Host: LO

________________________________________________________________________

Press the [image] button to sent the LOCK (Ltrs-shift) command in PC-Pakratt for windows.

AMTOR and BAUDOT:

LOCK is an immediate command used to force a LETTERS shift in the received data. This can be helpful if noise has garbled the LTRS character causing FIGURES to be displayed.

FAX:

This is a manual start command for FAX. Normally the transmitting station starts a FAX image with sync pulses so that the receiver automatically lines up with the edge of the paper. If you tune in a signal too late, or there is so much noise that the sync pulses are not detected, you can start reception manually with the LOCK command. If you issue a LOCK to the TNC, you will probably need to use the JUSTIFY command to properly align the image.

Morse:

LOCK is an immediate command that instructs the TNC to lock its timing to the current measured speed of a Morse signal. The LOCK command may improve the TNC's ability to decode CW signals in the presence of high noise levels.  Press the [image] button in the Morse operating window to activate the Speed Lock feature.


MAildrop
  MAildrop   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host:  MV

________________________________________________________________________

ON    -   The TNC operates as a personal packet BBS or

 MailDrop.

OFF  -   The TNC only operates as a normal AX.25 Level 2 TNC (default).

________________________________________________________________________

The TNC's MailDrop is a personal mailbox that uses a subset of the W0RLI/WA7MBL PBBS commands. In PC-Pakratt for Windows, turn the MailDrop ON by pressing the [image] button on the operating window Tool Bar.

When MailDrop is ON, other stations can connect to your TNC, leave messages for you or read messages from you.  To enable the MailDrop in AMTOR and PACTOR modes, see the TMAIL command.

See the 3RDPARTY, MDCHECK, MDPROMPT, MDMON, MTEXT, MMSG and MYMAIL commands.


MARsdisp
  MARsdisp   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Baudot and AMTOR, RTTY

  Host: MW

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    The TNC translates received LTRS characters to a <CTRL-O>, and FIGS characters to a <CTRL-N> and sends these to the terminal.

OFF  -   The TNC operates as before in Baudot and AMTOR (default).

________________________________________________________________________

The MARSDISP command permits the Baudot and AMTOR operator to detect and display every character including LTRS and FIGS sent by the other station. The ACRDISP and ALFDISP may be turned off to prevent extraneous carriage-returns and Linefeeds from being sent to the display. If this data is re-transmitted, ACRRTTY should be 0, and ALFRTTY should be OFF. The <CTRL-O> and <CTRL-N> characters will send LTRS and FIGS respectively.


MAXframe
  MAXframe   "n/n"

 Default: 4/4

  Mode: Packet

  Host: MX

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    1 to 7 signifies a number of packet frames.

________________________________________________________________________

MAXFRAME limits the number of unacknowledged packets your TNC permits on the radio link for each Radio Port.  It is also the number of contiguous packets your TNC will send in a single transmission.

The "best" value of MAXFRAME depends on your local channel conditions. In most cases of local VHF packet keyboard operation, the default value of MAXFRAME 4 works well.  When the amount of traffic is heavy, the path in use is poor as on HF, you are using many digipeaters, you can actually improve your throughput by reducing MAXFRAME. When operating HF packet try setting MAXFRAME to 1.


MBEll
  MBEll   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: ME

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   Will send 3 BELL characters to the terminal when the callsign(s) of the station(s) monitored match the MFROM and MTO lists.

OFF -   The TNC will not send BELL characters to the terminal due to MONITORED packets.

________________________________________________________________________

MBELL can be used to alert the user to the presence of particular packet station(s) on the frequency. For example if you want to be alerted when N7ML appears on DSP Radio Port 2 you would set the following:

          MBELL ON

          MONITOR 0/4

          MFROM yes N7ML

          MTO NONE

When MBELL is ON, packets from and to all stations are displayed, but only those packets matching the MFROM and MTO lists cause the bell to ring.


MBx
  MBx   call1[,call2][-"n"][ALL]

  Default: none

  Mode: Packet

  Host: MB

________________________________________________________________________

call  -   The call signs of one or two stations to be monitored.

"n"   -   0 to 15, indicating an optional SSID.

________________________________________________________________________

The MBX command permits you to read or record useful or needed data without having to connect or log on to the source station(s).

MBX filters the received packet data so that only packets from the selected station(s) are shown, without headers or repeated frames.  MBX overrides normal monitor functions and can show one or both sides of a conversation.

The operation of MBX command is as follows:

MBX NONE    (Default) All monitored frames are shown with their headers.

MBX ALL      Only the data fields in the I-frames and UI frames are shown.  Data from retried frames       will be shown each time such a frame is   monitored. The MFROM and MTO commands are active.

MBX CALL 1  Only the data in the I and UI frames to or from CALL 1 are shown. CALL 1 can be either the source or destination station.  Retried frames are not shown. The MFROM and MTO commands are ignored.

MBX CALL 1, Only the data in the I and UI frames are shown when CALL 1 is the CALL 2 source and CALL 2 is the destination or vice-versa.  Retried frames are not shown.  The MFROM and MTO commands are ignored.

A packet connection on any channel inhibits monitoring, if MBX is not set to "none".  MCON will only work if MBX is set to "none".

Clear MBX with "%" "&" "N" "NO" "NONE" or "OFF" as arguments.


MCon
  MCon   "n"

  Default: 0 (none)

  Mode: Packet

  Host: MC

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 6 signifies various levels of monitor indications

________________________________________________________________________

Use MCON for selective monitoring of other packet traffic while connected to a distant station. MCON works in similar fashion to MONITOR, but affects your display only while the TNC is connected to another station. This includes connections to the MailDrop.

If MCON is set to a value between "1" and "5," frames meant for you are displayed as though monitoring was OFF. You'll see only the data. If MCON is set to "6," frames meant for you are displayed as any other monitored frame.  The headers appear together with the data.

The meanings of the parameter values are:

0    Monitoring while connected is disabled.

1    Only unnumbered (UI) frames resulting from an unconnected transmission are  displayed. Use this for an "unproto," roundtable type QSO. This setting also display beacons.

2    Numbered (I) frames are also displayed.  Use this to monitor connected  conversations in progress.

3    Connect request (SABM or "C") frames and disconnect (DISC or "D") frames  are also displayed with the headers.

4    Unnumbered acknowledgment (UA) of connect- and disconnect-state frames are  also displayed with either the characters "UA" or "DM" and a header.

5    Receive Ready (RR), Receive Not Ready (RNR), Reject (RJ), Frame Reject (FRMR) and (I)-Frames are also displayed.

6    Poll/Final bit, PID and sequence numbers are also displayed.


  MDCheck

  Immediate Command

  Mode: AMTOR/PACTOR/Packet MailDrop

  Host: M1

________________________________________________________________________

MDCHECK is an immediate command which allows you to log on to your own MailDrop. After logging on, you can EDIT, LIST, READ, SEND or KILL MailDrop messages.

In the Packet, AMTOR and PACTOR modem windows of PC-Pakratt for Windows, this is done by clicking on the [image] icon in the tool bar.

To use the MDCHECK command, and your TNC must not be connected to or linked to any packet or AMTOR stations.  For monitoring purposes, local access of the MailDrop is considered a connection.  Type "B" (BYE) to quit local control of your MailDrop.


MDigi
  MDigi   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: MD

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    I and UI frames having your call sign (MYCALL or MYALIAS) as the next digipeater in the field are displayed, regardless of connected status.

OFF  -   Normal monitoring as determined by the monitoring mode commands.

________________________________________________________________________

MDIGI permits you to display packets when another station uses your station as a digipeater. If you want to monitor ALL traffic that flows through your packet station, set MDIGI ON.

You may not want to see all the data passing through your station, especially if many others use you as a digipeater.  In this case set MDIGI OFF (default).


MDMon
  MDMon   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: AMTOR and Packet/MailDrop

  Host: Mm

________________________________________________________________________

ON    -   Monitor a calling station's activity on your MailDrop.

OFF  -   Normal monitoring as determined by the monitoring mode commands.

________________________________________________________________________

Press the [image] button on the tool bat to set MDMON to ON and monitor activity on your MailDrop.

MDMON permits you to monitor activity on your AMTOR or packet MailDrop showing you both sides of the QSO.  Packet headers are not shown while a caller is logged on. When no one is connected to your MailDrop, channel activity is monitored according to the setting of MONITOR.

Set MDMON OFF to cancel MailDrop monitoring. Note that MailDrop connect and link status messages will be displayed even with MDMON OFF. These status messages are important and allow you to see who is connected to your MailDrop. They can be disabled however with the UBIT 13 command.


MDPrompt
  MDPrompt    text

  Default: (see text)

  Mode: PACTOR/Packet MailDrop

  Host: Mp

________________________________________________________________________

text   -   Any combination of characters and spaces up to a maximum of 80 bytes.

________________________________________________________________________

MDPROMPT is the command line sent to a calling station by your Packet or PACTOR MailDrop in response to a Send message command.  The default text is:

     "Subject:/Enter message, ^Z (CTRL-Z) or /EX to end"

Text before the first slash is sent to the user as the subject prompt; text after the slash is sent as the message text prompt. If there is no slash in the text, the subject prompt is "Subject:" and the text prompt is from MDPROMPT.


MFIlter
  MFIlter    n1[,n2[,n3[,n4]]]

  Default: $80

  Mode: Morse, Baudot ASCII, AMTOR, PACTOR and Packet

  Host: MI

_______________________________________________________________________

"n"  -     0 to $80 (0 to 128 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code. Up to four characters may be specified separated by commas.

_______________________________________________________________________

Use MFILTER to select up to 4 characters to be "filtered," or excluded from Morse, Baudot, ASCII, AMTOR-Listen, PACTOR-Listen and monitored packets. Parameters "n1," - "n4" are the ASCII codes for the characters you want to filter. The special value of $80 (default) filters all characters above $7F and all control-characters except carriage-return ($0D), linefeed ($0A), and TAB ($09).

See also AFILTER.


MFrom
  MFrom   ALL/NONE or YES/NO call1[,call2..]

  Default: ALL

  Mode: Packet

  Host: MF

________________________________________________________________________

call  -    ALL/NONE or YES_list/NO_list (list of up to eight call signs, separated by commas).

________________________________________________________________________

MFROM determines what packets are monitored. To monitor all packets, set MFROM to ALL.  To stop any packets from being displayed, set MFROM and MTO to NONE.

To display packets from one or more specific stations, type MFROM YES followed by a list of call signs you WANT to monitor packets from. To hide packets from one or more specific stations, type MFROM NO followed by a list of call signs you want NOT to monitor packets from.  When using MFROM, set MTO to NONE.

You can include optional SSIDs specified as "-n" after the call sign. If MFROM is set to "NO N6IA," any combination N6IA-0,...N6IA-15 will NOT be monitored.  If MFROM is set to "YES N6IA-1," then only N6IA-1 will be monitored.

When MFROM and MTO contain different arguments, the following priority applies:

     1.   ALL,

     2.   NO_list,

     3.   YES_list,

     4.   NONE

Clear MFROM with "%" "&" or "OFF" as arguments.


  MHeard

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Packet, PACTOR and AMTOR MailDrop

  Host: MH

________________________________________________________________________

MHEARD is an immediate command that displays a list of up to 18 most recently heard stations.  Stations that are heard directly are marked with a * in the heard log.  Stations that have been repeated by a digipeater are not marked.

In the HF or VHF packet windows of PC-Pakratt for Windows this is done with the [image] icon.

When DAYTIME has been set, entries in the heard log are time stamped. When DAYSTAMP is ON the date is also shown. An example of the MHEARD display is shown below:

DAYSTAMP ON	DAYSTAMP OFF

05-Jul-86  21:42:27  WA1FJW	21:42:27  WA1FJW

05-Jul-86  21:42:24  WA1IXU*  	21:42:24  WA1IXU*

Clear the MHEARD list with the CLEAR button or a "%", "&", "N," "NO," "NONE" or "OFF" as arguments in the Dumb Terminal mode.

Prior to the Nov 1993 firmware release, stations heard directly were displayed with an asterisk ("W1AW*") and digipeated stations were shown without ("W2SZ"). Digipeating has gone out of style, and most stations are now heard direct, so the Nov 1993 release discards the asterisk. Instead, for those few cases in which a station is heard indirectly through a digipeater, the station is displayed "via digi".

In addition, I- and UI-frames with PIDs of CF and CD are shown with indicators "N/R" (for Net/ROM) and "IP" respectively. AMTOR and PACTOR stations accessing the MailDrop or the gateway are shown in the MHEARD list with an "AMTOR" or "PACTOR" indicator.


MId
  MId   "n/n"

  Default: 0/0 (00 sec.)

  Mode: Packet , AMTOR, PACTOR

  Host: Mi

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -     0 - 250 specifies the Morse ID timing in units of 10 second intervals.

0 (zero) disables this function.

________________________________________________________________________

If "n" is set to some value from 1 to 250, the TNC will periodically issue a 20 wpm Morse ID on any given Radio Port.  For example, an MID of 0/177 would cause a Morse ID every 1,770 seconds (29.5 minutes) on Radio Port 2.  A Morse ID will only be transmitted if a packet was sent since the last Morse ID. The Morse ID uses TXDELAY, PPERSIST, and DCD.

If MID is set to a value other than 0, ID will force a Morse ID immediately.

If both HID and MID are active, the Morse ID will be sent first.

MID normally sends a Morse ID using on/off keying of the low tone. If FSK keying of both tones is desired to prevent stations from transmitting over your Morse ID, see the UBIT 12 command.

Morse ID now works in AMTOR and PACTOR modes, on both ARQ and broadcast transmissions. At user-settable intervals, the unit identifies in Morse Code, while maintaining the internal timing for AMTOR and PACTOR. Because of the nature of these operating modes, the receiving station will go into an error state during the Morse ID, but should recover data synchronization immediately afterwards.


MMsg
  MMsg   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet/AMTOR/PACTOR MailDrop

  Host: MU

________________________________________________________________________

ON  -    The stored MTEXT message is sent as the first response after an AMTOR link or a Packet or PACTOR connect to the MailDrop is established.

OFF -   The MTEXT message is not sent at all.

________________________________________________________________________

MMSG enables or disables automatic transmission of the MTEXT message when your AMTOR, PACTOR or Packet MailDrop links with another station.


MODem
  MODem   "n"   (PK-900 "n / n")

  Default: 12	(PK-900 default 11/4)

  Mode: All

  Host: Mg

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 61 signifies a modem number from the list below

________________________________________________________________________

The MODEM command determines what DSP Modem is selected for Radio Port 1 of the TNC.  The Modems available in EPROM are listed below.  Other modems can be loaded into RAM of the TNC and selected as well. This procedure is discussed in the QLOAD command description.

The DSP modems included in the TNC can be shown with the DIRECT(ory) command and are listed below:

PK-900 modem directory:

  - Port 1 -                         - Port 2 -

 1: FSK 45 bps 170: 2125/2295       1: Internal 200: 1070/1270

 2: FSK 100 bps 170: 2125/2295      2: Internal 200: 2025/2225

 3: FSK 45 bps 200: 2110/2310       3: Internal 1000: 1200/2200

 4: FSK 100 bps 200: 2110/2310      4: Internal 1000: 1200/2200 eq.

 5: FSK 100 bps 425: 2125/2550      5: Internal 200: 1180/980

 6: FSK 100 bps 850: 2125/2975      6: Internal 200: 1850/1650

 7: FSK 100 bps 850: 1275/2125      7: Internal 800: 2100/1300

 8: Analog 900/2500                 8: Internal 800: 2100/1300 eq.

 9: FSK 2400 bps 800: 1300/2100     9: Internal option

10: FSK 300 bps 200: 2110/2310      10: Modem disconnect header

11: FSK 1200 bps 1000: 1200/2200

12: Morse 750

DSP-2232 modem directory:

  (930315)

  1: RTTY/TOR 170: 2125/2295                  2: RTTY/TOR 170: 1445/1275

  3: RTTY/TOR 425: 2125/2550                  4: RTTY/TOR 850: 2125/2975

  5: RTTY/TOR 200: PACTOR 2110/2310           6: RTTY/TOR 200: PACTOR 1460/1260

 10: p1 Packet 300 bps HF 2110/2310           11: p1 Packet 300 bps HF 1460/1260

 12: p1 Packet 1200 bps VHF                   13: p1 Packet 1200 bps PACSAT

 14: p1 Packet 1200 bps PSK                   15: p1 Packet 2400 bps V.26B

 16: p1 Packet 4800 bps PACSAT                17: p1 Packet 4800 bps PSK

 18: p1 Packet 9600 bps FSK K9NG/G3RUH        20: p2 Packet 300 bps HF 2110/2310

 22: p2 Packet 1200 bps VHF                   23: p2 Packet 1200 bps PACSAT

 25: p2 Packet 2400 bps V.26B                 28: p2 Packet 9600 bps FSK K9NG/G3RUH

 30: RTTY/TOR 170: 2125/2295; p2 Packet 300 bps HF 2110/2310

 31: RTTY/TOR 170: 2125/2295; p2 Packet 1200 bps VHF

 32: RTTY/TOR 200:PACTOR 2110/2310; p2 Packet 300 bps HF 2110/2310

 33: p1 Packet 300 bps HF 2110/2310; p2 Packet 1200 bps VHF

 34: RTTY/TOR 200:PACTOR 2110/2310; p2 Packet 1200 bps VHF

 35: p1 Packet 1200 bps VHF; p2 Packet 1200 bps VHF

 40: Morse 750 Hz                             41: Analog FAX HF

 42: Analog FAX APT                           43: Analog SSTV

 44: DSP data 400 bps OSCAR-13                45: RTTY/TOR 1200 bps ASCII OSCAR-11

 46: DSP data Spectrum                        50: p1 Packet 1200 bps MSK

 51: p1 Packet 2400 bps MSK                   60: p2 Packet 1200 bps MSK

 61: p2 Packet 2400 bps MSK


Monitor
  Monitor   "n/n"

  Default: 4/4 (UA DM C D I UI)

  Mode: Packet

  Host: MN

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 6 signifies various levels on monitor indications

________________________________________________________________________

The Monitor command determines what kind of packets ( on each DSP Radio Port) are displayed when the TNC is NOT connected to any other packet stations.

The meanings of the parameter values are:

0    All packet monitoring functions are disabled.

1    Only unnumbered (UI) frames resulting from an unconnected transmission are  displayed. Use this for an "unproto," round-table type QSO.  This setting also displays beacons.

2    Numbered (I) frames are also displayed.  I-frames are numbered in order of  generation and result from a connected transmission.  Use this to monitor connected conversations in progress.

3    Connect request (SABM or "C") frames and disconnect (DISC or "D") frames are also displayed with the headers.

4    Unnumbered acknowledgment (UA) of connect- and disconnect-state frames are also displayed with either the characters "UA" or "DM" and a header.

5    Receive Ready (RR), Receive Not Ready (RNR), Reject (RJ), Frame Reject (FRMR) and (I)-Frames are also displayed.

6    Poll/Final bit, PID and sequence numbers are also displayed.


MOpt
MOPt    ON|OFF

  Default: ON

  Mode: Morse

  Host: Mo

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    Enables PTT in Morse transmit mode.

OFF -    Disables PTT in Morse transmit mode.

________________________________________________________________________

MOPTT controls the PTT output in Morse mode only. To enable PTT for Morse transmissions, both XMITOK and MOPTT must be ON. XMITOK OFF still disables PTT for all operating modes.

The most probable use of MOPTT is the disable PTT in Morse to allow full break-in operation, but enable PTT in all other modes. Setting XMITOK OF and MOPTT OFF accomplishes this.

MOPTT does not affect the Morse IDs generated by the MID command (in Packet mode) and by the CWID character in other digital operating modes).


  MOrse

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Command

  Host: MO

________________________________________________________________________

MORSE is an immediate command that switches your TNC into the Morse mode (DSP Radio Port 1).

Unless you change MSPEED, your TNC uses the default Morse transmit speed value of 20 WPM.


MProto
  MProto    ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: MQ

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    Monitors all I and UI frames as before.

OFF -    Monitors only those I and UI frames with a PID byte of $F0.

________________________________________________________________________

This is in response to NET/ROM, which sends frames that have a PID of $CF, and that contain Control characters.  If you want to monitor every frame including those used by NET/ROM, you must turn MPROTO ON.


MRpt
  MRpt   ON|OFF

  Default: ON

  Mode: Packet

  Host: MR

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   Show digipeater path in the packet header.

OFF -   Show only originating and destination stations in the packet header.

________________________________________________________________________

MRPT affects the way monitored packets are displayed.  When MRPT is ON (default), the call signs of all stations in the digipeat path are displayed. Call signs of stations heard directly are flagged with an asterisk (*) as shown:

   W2JUP-4*>WA1IXU>W1AW-5>W1AW-4 <I;0,3>:

When MRPT is OFF, only the originating station and the destination stations are displayed are displayed in the monitored packet header as shown below:

   W2JUP-4*>W1AW-4 <I;0,3>:


MSPeed
  MSPeed   "n"

  Default: 20 WPM

  Mode: Morse

  Host: MP

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -   5 to 99 signifies your TNC's Morse transmit speed.

________________________________________________________________________

In PC-Pakratt for windows, MSPEED is set on the tool bar.

The MSPEED command sets the Morse code keying (transmit) speed for Radio Port 1 of your TNC in the Morse Mode. The slowest available Morse code speed is 5 words per minute.  When using Morse speeds between 5 and 14 WPM, the transmitted code is sent with Farnsworth spacing at a character speed of 15 words per minute.  The spacing between characters is lengthened to produce an overall code rate of 5 to 14 WPM.


MStamp
  MStamp   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet, NAVTEX

  Host: MS

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    Monitored frames ARE time stamped.

OFF  -   Monitored frames ARE NOT time stamped.

________________________________________________________________________

The MSTAMP command activates time stamping of monitored packets and received NAVTEX messages. When your TNC's internal software clock is set, date and time information is available for automatic logging of packet activity and other applications.

Remember to set the date and time with the DAYTIME command.

When MSTAMP is OFF, the packet header display looks like this:

      W2JUP-4*>KA2EYW-1>AI2Q <I;2,2>:

When MSTAMP is ON and DAYSTAMP is OFF, the display looks like this:

      22:51:33  W2JUP-4*>KA2EYW-1>AI2Q <I;2,2>:


MTExt
  MTExt   text

  Default: See sample

  Mode: AMTOR/PACTOR/Packet MailDrop

  Host: Mt

________________________________________________________________________

text   -   Any printable message up to a maximum of 120 characters.

________________________________________________________________________

MTEXT is the "MailDrop automatic answer" text similar to CTEXT. If MMSG is ON, the MTEXT message is sent when a station links to your AMTOR, PACTOR or Packet MailDrop.

The default text is:

      "Welcome to my AEA TNC MailDrop.

       Type H for help."

In the Dumb Terminal mode, MTEXT can be cleared with a "%", "&", "N," "NO," "NONE" or "OFF" as arguments.


MTo
  MTo   ALL/NONE or YES/NO call1[,call2..]

  Default: none

  Mode: Packet

  Host: MT

________________________________________________________________________

call  -    ALL/NONE or YES_list/NO_list (list of up to eight call signs, separated by commas).

________________________________________________________________________

MTO determines what packets are monitored. To monitor all packets, set MTO to ALL.  To stop any packets from being displayed, set MTO and MFROM to NONE.

To display packets TO one or more specific stations, type MTO YES followed by a list of call signs you WANT to monitor packets to. To hide packets TO one or more specific stations, type MTO NO followed by a list of call signs you want NOT to monitor packets to. When using MTO, set MFROM to NONE.

You can include optional SSIDs specified as "-n" after the call sign.  If MTO is set to "NO N6IA," any combination N6IA-0,...N6IA-15 will NOT be monitored. If MTO is set to "YES N6IA-1," then only N6IA-1 will be monitored.

When MFROM and MTO contain different arguments, the following priority applies:

          1.   ALL,

          2.   NO_list,

          3.   YES_list,

          4.   NONE

Clear MTO with "%" "&" or "OFF" as arguments.


MWeight
  MWeight   "n"

  Default: 10

  Mode: All except Packet

  Host: Mw

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -     5 to 15, specifies roughly 10 times the ratio of one dot length to one inter-element space length in transmitted Morse code.

________________________________________________________________________

MWEIGHT is set on the PC-Pakratt for windows tool bar.

A value of 10 results in a 1:1 dot-space ratio. A setting of 5 results in a 0.5:1 ratio, while a setting of 15 (maximum) results in a 1.5:1 ratio.

MWEIGHT applies only to the Morse transmit mode and the CW ID in all modes except packet on Radio Port 1.

MWEIGHT does not affect the code output by the MID command.


MXmit
  MXmit   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: Mx

________________________________________________________________________

ON  -    Monitor transmitted packets in the same manner as received packets.

OFF -   Do not monitor transmitted packets.

________________________________________________________________________

When MXMIT is ON, transmitted packets are monitored in the same manner as received packets.  The monitoring of transmitted packets is subject to the settings of MONITOR, MCON, MFROM, MTO, MRPT, and TRACE. Most transmitted packets occur during connections so MCON should probably be set to a non-zero value.


MYAlias
  MYAlias   call[-n]/call[-n]

  Default: none/none

  Mode: Packet

  Host: MA

________________________________________________________________________

call  -   Alternate packet digipeater identity of your TNC

"n"   -   0 to 15, an optional substation ID (SSID)

________________________________________________________________________

MYALIAS specifies an alternate call sign (in addition to the call sign specified in MYCALL) for use as a digipeater only. A MYALIAS In some areas wide-coverage digipeater operators change their call sign to a shorter and easier to remember identifier.

For those households with two operators taking turns using AEA products, the TNC will now accept connections to both MYCALL and MYALIAS.

In pre-Nov 1993 firmware, MYALIAS has been used only for digipeating. If MYMAIL is not set, the MailDrop also accepts connections to either MYCALL or MYALIAS.

Outgoing connect attempts and Unproto frames use only MYCALL, as the source callsign.


MYALTcal
  MYALTcal   aaaa

  Default: none

  Mode: AMTOR

  Host: MK

________________________________________________________________________

aaaa  -   Your alternate SELective CALling code (SELCALL)

________________________________________________________________________

Use the MYALTCAL command to specify an your alternate SELCALL which, under certain conditions, may be convenient or necessary.  You can enter an additional SELCALL code not related to your call sign.  The alternate SELCALL can be any four alphabetical characters, or can be numeric strings of either four or five numbers. MYALTCAL is generally used for special applications such as receiving network or group broadcasts in AMTOR Mode B Selective (Bs or SELFEC).

See also MYSELCAL and MYINDENT.


MYcall
  MYcall   call[-"n"]/call[-"n"]

  Default: TNC/TNC

  Mode: Packet and PACTOR

  Host: ML

________________________________________________________________________

call  -   Your call sign

"n"   -   0 - 15, indicating an optional substation ID, (SSID)

________________________________________________________________________

Use the MYCALL command to load your call signs into your TNC. The DSP's Radio Port 1 and Radio Port 2 may each have their own Packet callsign.

The "TNC" default call sign is present in your TNC's ROM for each Radio Port when the system is manufactured.  This "artificial call" must be changed for packet operation.

The callsign for each Port may be the same or different, but bear in mind that two or more stations cannot use the same call and SSID on the same frequency. Use a different SSID for each Radio Port if both Ports are on the same band or frequency.

MYCALL will be used in PACTOR only if the parameter MYPTCALL is not entered. The installation will automatically enter MYPTCALL if the instructions are followed.


MYGate
  MYGate   call[-"n"]

  Default: none

  Mode: Packet

  Host: MY

________________________________________________________________________

call  -    The Call Sign you wish to use for the Gateway.

"n"   -    Numeral indicating an optional substation ID (SSID) or extension.

________________________________________________________________________

Call is the call sign of the Gateway, default "none."

"Call" may have an optional SSID, and must not be the same call sign and SSID as MYCALL or MYMAIL. When another station digipeats via the callsign set in MYGATE, your TNC will provide Gateway operation between Radio Port 1 and Radio Port 2 provided both ports are enabled for Packet operation.

This command is only present in the PK-900 and DSP-2232.  See Chapter 4 of the DSP-2232 or PK-900 operating manual for details of Gateway operation and limitations.

MYGATE is also the callsign of the Gateway or Node function of the data controller.


MYIdent
  MYIdent   aaaaaaa[aa]

 Default: none

  Mode: AMTOR

  Host: Mg

________________________________________________________________________

aaaaaaa[aa] -  Specifies the 7-character SELCALL as described in CCIR Rec. 625.

________________________________________________________________________

The MYIDENT command holds the CCIR Rec. 625 seven-character AMTOR SELCALL.

Amateurs may simply enter their callsign and the TNC will automatically translate it to a 7-character SELCALL as shown below:

          MYIDENT  KA1XYZ    becomes  MYIDENT  KAIXYZZ.

If aaaaaaa[aa] is nine numerals, the unit translates the numerals to seven letters according to Recommendation 491. If aaaaaaa consists of seven legal characters, the TNC accepts the characters without modifying them. Legal SELCALL characters for Rec. 625 are the letters A-Z except G, H, J, L, N and W.

If aaaaaaa is a string of characters of any length that includes illegal characters, the TNC will do the following translation on the characters:

   0: O	4: Y	8: B	J: U

   1: I	5: S	9: P	L: F

   2: Z	6: D	G: C	N: V

   3: E	7: T	H: K	W: M

  All other letters are unchanged.

If MYSELCAL and MYIDENT are both none (defaults), no incoming ARQ or SELFEC call can establish communications with the unit.


MYMail
MYMail   call[-"n"]

  Default: none

  Mode: AMTOR/PACTOR/Packet/MailDrop

  Host: Ma

________________________________________________________________________

call  -    The Call Sign you wish to use for the MailDrop.

"n"   -    Numeral indicating an optional substation ID (SSID) or extension.

________________________________________________________________________

Call is the call sign of the MailDrop, default "none."

"Call" may have an optional SSID, and must not be the same call sign and SSID as MYCALL. If you do not set MYMAIL, the MailDrop will use the same call sign and SSID as entered in MYCALL.  For example, if you have set MYCALL to N7ML then MYMAIL may be N7ML-1 through N7ML-15.  You can use the CTEXT and MTEXT messages to inform other stations who connect of your MYCALL and MYMAIL call signs.

In AMTOR and PACTOR, the callsign in MYMAIL or MYCALL is used for sending and receiving MailDrop messages.


MYPTcall
  MYPTcall   callsign

  Default: TNCcall

  Mode: PACTOR

  Host: Mf

________________________________________________________________________

callsign  -   The Call Sign you wish to use for PACTOR operation.

________________________________________________________________________

Use the MYPTCALL command to load your call sign into the TNC.

If you have not loaded a call into the TNC with MYPTCALL the call loaded with MYCALL will be used.  The difference between MYCALL and MYPTCALL is that MYCALL allows only the dash (-) to be used while MYPTCAL will allow any punctuation with the call.

If calls have not been loaded into either MYCALL or MYPTCALL, the TNC will not allow transmission in PACTOR.  An error message "Need MYCALL" will be displayed if transmission is attempted.

Example:  MYPTCALL  K6RFK/ZL


MYSelcal
  MYSelcal   aaaa

  Default: none

  Mode: AMTOR

  Host: MG

________________________________________________________________________

aaaa  -   Specifies your SELective CALling code (SELCALL)

________________________________________________________________________

Use the MYSELCAL command to enter the SELCALL (SELective CALLing) code required in AMTOR ARQ (Mode A) and SELFEC operating modes. MYSELCAL is a unique character string which must contain four alphabetic characters and is normally derived from your call sign.

Amateurs may simply enter their callsign and the TNC will automatically translate it to a 4-character SELCALL using the grouping table below:

     GROUP	CALL	SELCALL

     1 by 2	 W1XY	 WWXY

     1 by 3	 W1XYZ	 wXYZ

     2 by 1	 AB1X	 AABX

     2 by 2	 AB1XY	 ABXY

     2 by 3	KA1XYZ	 KXYZ

Although the convention is to form the SELCALL from the call sign, your TNC can include any AMTOR character in the SELCALL. In accordance with CCIR Recommendation 491, four- or five-digit numbers may be entered; the TNC automatically translates the numeric entry to your four-letter alpha SELCALL.

See also MYALTCAL  and MYINDENT.


NAVMsg
  NAVMsg   all, none, Yes\No (letters)

  Default: All

  Mode: NAVTEX

  Host: NM

________________________________________________________________________

letters   -    all, none, YES List, NO List.  List of up to 13 letters which may or may not be separated by spaces, commas or TABs.

________________________________________________________________________

NAVMSG uses Letter arguments to determine which NAVTEX messages your TNC will print. NAVTEX messages are grouped into classes by the second letter in the Preamble. The NAVMSG Command allows ALL, NONE or a list of up to 13 letters representing message types to be Monitored or Rejected.

NAVMSG may be cleared with "%" "&" or "OFF" as arguments.


NAVStn
  NAVStn   all, none, Yes\No (letters)

  Default: All

  Mode: NAVTEX

  Host: NS

________________________________________________________________________

letters   -     all, none, YES List, NO List.  List of up to 13 letters which may or may not be separated by spaces, commas or TABs.

________________________________________________________________________

The NAVSTN command uses letter arguments to determine which NAVTEX transmitting stations the TNC will print.  NAVTEX transmitters are identified by the 26 letters of the alphabet A-Z. The NAVSTN Command allows ALL, NONE or a list of up to 13 letters representing NAVTEX transmitting stations to be Monitored or Rejected.

NAVSTN may be cleared with "%" "&" or "OFF" as arguments.


  NAvtex

  Immediate Command

  Mode: All

  Host: NA

________________________________________________________________________

NAVTEX is an immediate command that switches Radio Port 1 of your TNC into the NAVTEX receive mode. Pressing the [image] button on the NAVTEX/TDM operating window tool bar activates this mode.

The TNC can accept only, or lock-out certain message classes and transmitting stations with the NAVMSG and NAVSTN commands described above.

For logging purposes, NAVTEX mode uses the setting of DAYTIME to print the date and/or time in front of the preamble if MSTAMP and DAYSTAMP are ON.


NEwmode
  NEwmode   ON|OFF

  Default: ON

  Mode: All

  Host: NE

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    The TNC automatically returns to the Command Mode at disconnect or return to receive.

OFF  -   The TNC does not return to Command Mode at disconnect or return to receive.

________________________________________________________________________

Your TNC always switches to a data transfer mode at the time of connection, unless NOMODE is ON. NEWMODE determines how your TNC behaves when the link is broken or when the state is changed from Transmit to Receive with the RECEIVE or CWID characters.

When NEWMODE is ON (default) and the link is disconnected, or if the connect attempt fails, your TNC returns to Command Mode. If NEWMODE is OFF and the link is disconnected, your TNC remains in Converse or Transparent Mode unless you have forced it to return to Command Mode.


NOmode
  NOmode   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: All

  Host: NO

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    The TNC switches modes only upon explicit command.

OFF -    The TNC changes modes according to NEWMODE.

________________________________________________________________________

When NOMODE is OFF (default), your TNC switches modes automatically according to NEWMODE. When NOMODE is ON your TNC never switches from Converse or Transparent Mode to Command Mode (or vice versa) by itself.  Only specific commands (CONVERSE, TRANSPARENT, or <CTRL-C>) change the operating mode.


NUCr
  NUCr   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: All

  Host: NR

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    <NULL> characters ARE sent to the terminal following <CR> characters.

OFF  -   <NULL> characters ARE NOT sent to the terminal following <CR>s.

________________________________________________________________________

The NULLS command sets the number of <NULL> characters that will be sent.

Some older printer-terminals require extra time for the printing head to do a carriage return and line feed.  NUCR ON solves this problem by making your TNC send <NULL> characters (ASCII code $00) to your computer or terminal.


NULf
  NULf   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: All

  Host: NF

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    <NULL> characters are sent to the terminal following <LF> characters.

OFF  -   <NULL> characters are not sent to the terminal following <LF>s.

________________________________________________________________________

Some older printer-terminals require extra time for the printing head to do a carriage return and line feed.  NULF ON solves this problem my making your TNC send <NULL> characters (ASCII code $00) to your computer or terminal. The NULLS command sets the number of <NULL> characters that will be sent.


NULLs
  NULLs   "n"

 Default: 0 (zero)

  Mode: All

  Host: NU

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 30 specifies the number of <NULL> characters

to be sent to your computer or terminal after <CR> or <LF>

when NUCR or NULF are set ON.

________________________________________________________________________

NULLS specifies the number of <NULL> characters (ASCII $00) to be sent to the terminal after a <CR> or <LF> is sent.  NUCR and/or NULF must be set to indicate whether nulls are to be sent after <CR>, <LF> or both. The null characters are sent from your TNC to your computer only in CONVERSE and Command Modes.


  Nums

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Baudot, AMTOR, TDM

  Host: NX

________________________________________________________________________

In Baudot, AMTOR and TDM receive, the NUMS command, or "N" will force the TNC into the FIGS case.

To issue the NUMS command in PC-Pakratt for windows press the [image] button on the tool bar.


  OK

  Immediate Command

  Mode:  SIGNAL

  Host: OK

________________________________________________________________________

OK normally follows the SIGNAL command after it has determined the class and speed of the received station.  Typing OK will change the commands RXREV, RBAUD or ABAUD and OPMODE to their proper value. If the SIGNAL command did not reveal any useful information, typing OK produces the "?bad" error message. Typing OK when not in the SIGNAL mode produces the "?not while in (mode)" error message.


  Opmode

  Immediate Command

  Mode:  Command

  Host: OP

________________________________________________________________________

OPMODE is an immediate command that shows the TNC's current mode of operation on Radio Port 1 as well as system status.  Opmode also displays the MORSE speed when in the Morse mode.  Use the OPMODE command at any time when your TNC is in the Command Mode to display the present operating mode. Here is a typical example:

cmd:o

      OPmode   AScii      RCVE


 OVer

  Immediate Command

  Mode:  Command

  Host: OV

________________________________________________________________________

OVER is an immediate command that reverses the link direction from sending to receiving. OVER can be considered the opposite of the ACHG command. The changeover happens as soon as possible, the unit does not wait for all characters in the buffer to be sent. OVER should be thought of as analogous to RCVE command (Neither command waits for the buffer to empty).

In PTCONN, this command accomplishes the same thing as sending the PTOVER character. The OVER command is useful in Host mode when sending transparent data (CONMODE TRANS). To change from ISS to IRS, one would normally send the PTOVER character, but in Transparent mode the character would be sent as data and would not change the link direction. The OVER command changes the direction without the need to change CONMODE to CONV first.

In AMTOR ARQ, this command inserts "+?" into the data stream being sent. if EAS is ON, the "+?" is echoed to the terminal.


  PAcket

 Immediate Command

 Mode: Command

 Host: PA

________________________________________________________________________

Use the PACKET command to switch your TNC (DSP Radio Port 1) into packet radio mode from any other operating mode.


PACLen
  PACLen   "n/n"

  Default: 128/128

  Mode: Packet

  Host: PL

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 255 specifies the maximum length of the data portion of a packet.

0    -    Zero is equivalent to 256.

________________________________________________________________________

PACLEN sets the maximum number of data bytes to be carried in each packet's "information field" on each Radio Port.

Most keyboard-to-keyboard operators use the default value of 128 bytes for routine VHF/UHF packet services.  For this reason the default is set to 128 as shown above. On HF Packet PACLEN should be reduced to 64 or less. Your TNC automatically sends a packet when the number of characters you type for a packet equals "n."


PACTime
  PACTime   EVERY|AFTER "n"

  Default: AFTER 10 (1000 msec.)

  Mode: Packet

  Host: PT

________________________________________________________________________

"n"    -  0 to 250 specifies 100-millisecond intervals.

EVERY  -  Packet time-out occurs every "n" times 100 milliseconds.

AFTER   -  Packet time-out occurs when "n" times 100 milliseconds elapse without input from the computer or terminal.

________________________________________________________________________

The PACTIME parameter sets the amount of time in 100 msec increments that the TNC will wait for a character to be received on the serial port before sending a packet in Transparent Mode.  The PACTIME parameter is always used in Transparent Mode but is also used in Converse Mode if CPACTIME is ON.

When EVERY is specified, the characters you type are "packetized" every "n" times 100 milliseconds. When AFTER is specified, the characters you type are "packetized" when input from the terminal stops for "n" times 100 milliseconds.

The PACTIME timer is not started until the first character or byte is entered. A value of 0 (zero) for "n" means packets are sent with no wait time.


PACTor

Immediate Command

Mode: Command

Host: Pt

________________________________________________________________________

Immediate command switching the TNC into PACTOR operation. The TNC will enter the PACTOR Standby mode and be ready to receive a PACTOR connect.  See the PTLIST command to monitor other PACTOR stations.


PARity
  PARity   "n"

  Default: 0 (None)

  Mode: All

  Host: PR

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 3 selects a serial port parity from the table below.

________________________________________________________________________

PARITY sets the TNCs parity for RS-232 serial communications with PC-Pakratt for Windows.  All Host mode programs must use a Word length of 8 (AWLEN) and no parity to communicate with the TNC.  Although the TNC will support Parity options from the table below, no parity (0) will be automatically set by PPWIN.

0 = No    Parity	2 = No    Parity

1 = Odd  Parity	3 = Even Parity

If you will be using any other terminal programs with your TNC, be sure and set the RS-232 serial communications parameters to a word length (AWLEN) of 8, no parity and the same baud rate (TBAUD) as PC-Pakratt for Windows uses.  This can be found in the Configuration Menu.


PASs
  PASs   "n"

  Default: $16 <CTRL-V>

  Mode: Packet/ASCII

  Host: PS

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    0 to $7F (0 to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.

________________________________________________________________________

PASS selects the ASCII character used for the "pass" input editing commands. The parameter "n" is the ASCII code for the character used to pass editing characters (default <CTRL-V>. The PASS character signals that the following character is to be included in a packet or ASCII text string.

The PASS character in HOST mode is CTRL-P and can not be changed. The PASS character can only be changed (and have effect) in the Dumb Terminal Mode.


PASSAll
  PASSAll   ON|OFF/ON|OFF

  Default: OFF/OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: PX

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    Your TNC will accept packets with valid or invalid CRCs.

OFF -    Your TNC will accept packets with valid CRCs only.

________________________________________________________________________

PASSALL turns off the TNC's packet error-detecting mechanism and displays received packets with invalid CRCs. The parameter is settable for each Radio Port.

PASSALL is normally turned OFF (default); which ensures that packet data is error-free by rejecting packets with invalid CRC fields.  When PASSALL is ON, packets are displayed, despite CRC errors.

The MHEARD logging is disabled since the call signs detected may be incorrect.


PErsist
  PErsist   "n/n"

  Default: 63/63

  Mode: Packet

  Host: PE

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    0 to 255 specifies the threshold for a random attempt to transmit.

________________________________________________________________________

The PERSIST parameter works with the  and SLOTTIME parameter to achieve true p-persistent CSMA (Carrier-Sense Multiple Access) in Packet operation.  PERSIST is settable for both Radio Port 1 and Radio Port 2 to allow for different types of operation on each Port.


PPersist
  PPersist   ON|OFF/ON|OFF

  Default: ON/ON

  Mode: Packet

  Host: PP

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   The TNC uses p-persistent CSMA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access).

OFF  -  The TNC uses DWAIT for TAPR-type 1-persistent CSMA.

________________________________________________________________________

When PPERSIST is ON (default), the TNC uses the PERSIST and SLOTTIME parameters for p-persistent CSMA instead of the WAIT CSMA procedure. PPERSIST may be enabled or disabled on each Radio Port.

When your computer has queued data for transmission, the TNC monitors the DCD signal from its modem. When the channel clears, the TNC generates a random number between 0 and 255. If this number is less-than or equal to "PERSIST", the TNC transmits all frames in its queue. If the random number is greater than "P", the TNC waits .01 * SLOTTIME seconds and repeats the attempt.

PPERSIST can be used in both KISS and normal AX.25 operation.


PRCon
  PRCon   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode:  All

  Host: PC

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   A parallel printer is connected to the TNC via the special cable.

OFF  -  There is no parallel printer connected, or it is not currently in use.

________________________________________________________________________

PRCON tells the TNC whether or not a parallel printer is connected to the Parallel Port. A parallel printer may come in handy to print "hard copy" or channel activity without the need for keeping a dedicated computer connected and turned ON.  When PRCON is ON all data that would normally be displayed to a computer or terminal screen is instead sent to the parallel printer port. When PRCON is OFF (default) received data is sent to the RS-232 serial port instead.

Note that the PK-900 does not have a parallel port.


PRFax
  PRFax   ON|OFF

  Default: ON

  Mode:  FAX

  Host: PF

_______________________________________________________________________

ON   -    FAX graphics are sent to the parallel printer if PRCON is on.

OFF -    FAX graphics are sent to the RS-232 serial port.

_______________________________________________________________________

PRFAX should be ON if a parallel printer is connected to the TNC and in use for printing facsimile pictures.  If you wish to save the facsimile graphic data to disk for later retrieval, simply turn PRFAX OFF and set AWLEN to 8 to allow 8-bit data to be sent to the serial port.

Note that the PK-900 does not have a parallel port.


PROut
  PROut   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode:  All

  Host: PO

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   All characters are sent to the parallel printer if PRCON is also ON.

OFF -   All text and data is sent to the terminal through the serial port.

________________________________________________________________________

This command is useful for any mode where the user wants to get a printed copy of what is being received by the TNC. It is especially desirable for those using a terminal with the TNC who otherwise can not get hard copy of received text.  It is also handy if you wish to use your computer for another purpose, and still monitor channel activity.

Note that the PK-900 does not have a parallel port.


PRType
  PRType   "n"

  Default: 2 (Epson)

  Mode:  FAX

  Host: PY

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    0 to 255, specifying a code for the type of dot graphics sequences used by your printer.

________________________________________________________________________

The following is a list of the different printer graphics types the TNC supports for direct FAX printing. Most of these types are broken up by manufacturers, however EPSON and IBM are the most popular and are supported by many printer manufacturers not shown in the list below.

If you are unsure about which type of graphics printer you have, check your printer's manual and locate a graphics command that matches one from the GRAPHICS ON section of the table below. If you find that your printer supports the "CHR$(27) K n1 n2" then try the EPSON (default) or IBM graphics formats before any of the others listed. These are the most widespread graphics formats in use that it is very likely your printer supports at least one of them.

PRTYPE	Printer	GRAPHICS ON Sequence

0	Epson	$27 K n1 n2

4	IBM	$27 K n1 n2

8	Tandy Radio Shack	$18

12	Apple (G)	$27 G n n n n

16	Apple (S)	$27 S n n n n

20	old Okidata	$03

24	Okidata	$03

28	Gemini 10, 15	$27 K n1 n2

32	Star Micronics	$27 K n1 n2

36	GX-100, Gorilla	$08

40	Texas Instruments	$27 K n1 n2

44	Genicom	$27 K n1 n2

48      Miscellaneous	       (HP ThinkJet)

52	Citizen	$27 K n1 n2

56	NEC	$27 > $27 M $27 S0960

60	Anadex	$28

Unsupported PRTYPE settings are treated as PRTYPE 0.

Notice that the PRTYPEs are assigned in groups of four.  This is done to handle the different carriage widths used (standard 8-1/2" and wide 13") and also the number of data bits the printer can accept (7 or 8).  Add the following number to each of the above PRTYPEs to customize the TNC for your printer.

     +0:     7-bit graphics data, standard (8-1/2" paper)

     +1:     7-bit graphics data, wide (13" paper)

     +2:     8-bit graphics data, standard (8-1/2" paper)

     +3:     8-bit graphics data, wide (13" paper)

As an example, the default PRTYPE setting of 2 was chosen because most printers are standard width (8-1/2" paper) and will handle the Epson 8-bit graphics format.  Thus the Epson PRTYPE of 0 was chosen from the table above, and the quantity +2 was added to select the standard printer carriage and 8-bit data.

If you have a wide carriage Epson printer (and wide paper of course) you would have wanted to add the quantity +3 to the Epson PRTYPE listed in the table.


PT200
PT200   ON | OFF

Default: OFF

Mode: PACTOR

Host: PH

________________________________________________________________________

ON  -    PACTOR baud rate may be automatically shifted to 200 baud if the error rate is low.

OFF -   PACTOR baud rate will be limited to 100 baud.

________________________________________________________________________

PT200 can be enabled from the tool bar in PC-Pakratt for windows by pressing the [image] button.

When OFF. the PACTOR baud rate is limited to 100 baud. When ON, the PACTOR baud rate may be automatically increased to 200 baud, if the error rate is low enough. See the PTUP, PTDOWN and UCMD commands for more information.


PTConn
PTConn   aaaa(aaa)

Immediate Command

Mode: PACTOR

Host: PG

________________________________________________________________________

aaaa(aaa)  -    Call sign of the distant station to which you wish to be connected.

________________________________________________________________________

Press the PTCONN button [image] to open the PACTOR Connect dialog box and request to the station "aaaa".

The PTCONN command works on the PK-232 and Port 1 of the DSP-2232, DSP-1232 and PK-900 when the firmware supports PACTOR operation.

For example: PTC N7ML


PTDOWN
PTDOWN    "n"

Default: 6

Mode: PACTOR

Host: See the UCMD command

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -     Sets the number of incorrect packets that must be received to slow from 200 to 100 baud.

________________________________________________________________________

The PTDOWN command sets the sets the number of incorrect PACTOR packets that must be received in a row before generating an automatic request to change from 200 to 100 baud.

Note:  PTDOWN is not a true TNC Command, rather it is simply the way PC-Pakratt for Windows displays this PACTOR feature.  The command actually sent to the TNC when PTDOWN is selected is UCMD 1.

See the command UCMD for more information.


PTH
PTHuff    "n"

Default: 0

Mode: PACTOR

Host: PH

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -   A number representing the type of compression used in PACTOR from the table below.  (0 = no compression)

________________________________________________________________________

To enhance the effective data rate in PACTOR, a data compression scheme from the table below may be automatically enabled.

0  -  is no compression (default).

1  -  is Huffman encoding.

2,3  -  presently are not implemented but are reserved for future use.

Instead of using the normal 8 bit ASCII representation of a character, Huffman encoding assigns each character a code that may be as short as 2 bits for the most used characters to as long as 15 bits for the least used characters.  For English (and most other languages), the use of Huffman compression results in a smaller number of bits necessary for a given message.  For messages consisting of non-text information such as computer programs, Huffman compression would need more bits than ASCII and would be less efficient.  The TNC will automatically determine whether Huffman compression is more efficient and use the better technique.

If PTHuff is 0 (or OFF), PACTOR will never send data with Huffman compression.  It will always be able to receive other PACTOR transmissions whether they are compressed or not.


 PTList

Immediate Command

Mode: PACTOR

Host: PG

________________________________________________________________________

Immediate command switching of the TNC into the PACTOR Listen mode. Pressing this button on the tool bar [image] allows you to monitor a PACTOR QSO between to connected stations as well as round table conversations and CQs made in the PTSEND mode.


PTOver

Default: <Ctrl-Z>

Mode: PACTOR

Host: PN

________________________________________________________________________

PTOver is the character (default <CTRL-Z> typed that is used to change the direction of the data transmission in a Connected PACTOR QSO.


PTRound
PTRound   ON | OFF

Default: OFF

Mode: PACTOR

Host: Pr

________________________________________________________________________

ON  -    Returns to the PACTOR-Listen mode after a PTSEND transmission.

OFF -   Returns to the PACTOR-Standby mode after a PTSEND transmission.

________________________________________________________________________

PTROUND facilitates PACTOR "Roundtable" conversations with multiple stations using the PTSEND (FEC) mode as opposed to the Connected mode.

As the TNC finishes sending a PTSEND transmission, it normally returns to PACTOR Standby mode. If PTROUND is ON, the unit returns to PTLIST instead., in order to copy another station's PACTOR transmission. PTROUND has no effect when PACTOR connection ends; the unit will always return to PACTOR standby.


PTSend
PTSend   "n,x"

Immediate Command

Default :1,2

Mode: PACTOR

Host: PD

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -  Sets the transmission baud rate to 100 baud (most common).

"x"  -  Sets the number of repeats.

________________________________________________________________________

Pressing the [image] button on the tool bar initiates an unprotocol PACTOR transmission. To end the transmission, type <CTRL-D>.  Use the PTSEND command to call "CQ" in PACTOR and for roundtable PACTOR conversations.

"n" selects the transmission baud rate.

    n=1.... Selects 100 baud (most common)

    n=2.... Selects 200 baud.

"x" selects the number of repeats.

The defaults is 100 baud (n=1) and 2 repeats.


PTSUM
PTSUM   "n"

Default: 5

Mode: PACTOR

Host: See the UCMD command

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -  Sets the maximum number of Memory ARQ packets that are combined to form one good packet.

________________________________________________________________________

The PTSUM command sets the maximum number of packets the Memory ARQ system will attempt to combine into one good packet.  When this number is exceeded, all stored information is cleared and the Memory ARQ system is re-initialized.

Note:  PTSUM is not a true TNC Command, rather it is simply the way PC-Pakratt for Windows displays this PACTOR feature.  The command actually sent to the TNC when PTSUM is selected is UCMD 3.

See the command UCMD for more information.


PTTRIES
PTTRIES   "n"

Default: 2

Mode: PACTOR

Host: See the UCMD command

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -  Sets the number of packets sent in a speed-up attempt.

________________________________________________________________________

The PTTRIES command sets the maximum number of packets the TNC will send to the linked PACTOR station when an attempt is made to  speed-up to 200 baud.

Note:  PTTRIES is not a true TNC Command, rather it is simply the way PC-Pakratt for Windows displays this PACTOR feature.  The command actually sent to the TNC when PTTRIES is selected is UCMD 2.

See the command UCMD for more information.


PTUP
PTUP   "n"

Default: 3

Mode: PACTOR

Host: See the UCMD command

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -  Sets the number of correct packets in a row that must be received before generating a request to increase to 200 baud.

________________________________________________________________________

The PTUP command sets the number of correct packets that the TNC must receive at 100 baud in a row in order to generate a request to speed up.  When this number of packets without errors is received, the TNC will send a request to the connected PACTOR station to speed-up to 200 baud.

Note:  PTUP is not a true TNC Command, rather it is simply the way PC-Pakratt for Windows displays this PACTOR feature.  The command actually sent to the TNC when PTUP is selected is UCMD 0.

See the command UCMD for more information.


QData
  QData   "n"

  Default:  44 (Modem 44)

  Mode: DSP DATA

  Host: QA

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -     Modem number to be selected when the DSP DATA mode is entered.

________________________________________________________________________

QDATA sets the TNC modem that will automatically selected when the DSP DATA mode is entered.

See the DSPDATA and MODEM commands for more information.


QFax
  QFax   "n"

  Default:  41 (Modem 41)

  Mode: Packet

  Host: QF

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    Modem number to be selected when the FAX and Analog modes are entered.

________________________________________________________________________

QFAX sets the TNC modem that will automatically selected when the FAX and Analog modes are entered.

See the ANALOG, FAX, and MODEM commands for more information.


QHpacket
  QHpacket   "n/n"

  Default:  10 (PK-900 default 10/4)

  Mode: Packet

  Host: QH

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    Modem number to be selected when the HF Packet mode is entered.

________________________________________________________________________

QHPACKET sets the TNC modem that will automatically selected when the HF Packet mode is entered.  To enter the HF packet mode, the VHF command must be OFF for the selected Radio Port.

See the PACKET and MODEM commands for more information.


QLoad
  QLoad   "n"  "p"

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Command

  Host: QL

________________________________________________________________________

The QLOAD command is only available in the DSP-1232 or DSP-2232 Data Controllers.  QLOAD sets the unit to load DSP modem software through the serial port.  There are two positions in RAM for modems to be uploaded to the DSP unit.

To prepare the DSP unit for loading modem software through the serial port, the user types QLOAD n p, where n is the modem number (1-255) you wish to call the modem, and p is one of the following:

p = 0     RAM position 0

p = 1     RAM position 1

On power-up the modem directory in EPROM at physical address 40000 is copied to RAM at physical address 70000-705FF.  There are two 3K RAM positions available for modem software:  Position 1 is at physical address 70600-711FF, and Position 2 is at 71200-71DFF.  (System variables and stack are at 38000-3FFFF.)

After the user issues the QLOAD command, the command prompt changes from "cmd:" to a period and the load can begin.  During the QLOAD command, no echoing of terminal characters is performed.  When the DSP unit processes the "_END" command, the prompt reverts to "cmd:" and regular commands may resume.

The abort character is the COMMAND character (default CTRL-C).

The first time the user types the QLOAD command after power-up or RESTART, the user must enter both arguments n and p.  n and p are stored, and subsequent uses of QLOAD may omit p or both arguments.


QMORse
  QMORse   "n"

  Default:  40 (PK-900 default 12)

  Mode: Morse

  Host: QO

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    Modem number to be selected when the MORSE mode is entered.

________________________________________________________________________

QMORSE sets the TNC modem that will automatically selected when the Morse mode is entered.

See the MORSE and MODEM commands for more information.


QPTor
  QPTor   "n"

  Default:  5 (Modem 5)

  Mode: PACTOR

  Host: QP

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    Modem number to be selected when the PACTOR  modes is entered.

________________________________________________________________________

QPTOR sets the DSP modem that will automatically selected when the PACTOR mode is entered.  QPTOR is only available on the DSP-1232 or DSP-2232 data controllers.


QRtty
  QRtty   "n"

  Default:  1 (Modem 1)

  Mode: Baudot and ASCII RTTY

  Host: QR

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    Modem number to be selected when the ASCII or Baudot RTTY modes are entered.

________________________________________________________________________

QRTTY sets the TNC modem that will automatically selected when the Baudot or ASCII RTTY modes are entered.

See the BAUDOT, ASCII and MODEM commands for more information.


QSignal
  QSignal   "n"

  Default:  1 (PK-900 default 2)

  Mode: Signal

  Host: QS

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    Modem number to be selected when the SIGNAL mode is entered.

________________________________________________________________________

QSIGNAL sets the TNC modem that will automatically selected when the SIGNAL Identification mode is entered.

See the SIGNAL and MODEM commands for more information.


QTDm
  QTDm  "n"

  Default:  3 (PK-900 default 5)

  Mode: TDM

  Host: QD

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    Modem number to be selected when the TDM receive mode is entered.

________________________________________________________________________

TDM sets the TNC modem that will automatically selected when the TDM receive mode is entered.

See the TDM and MODEM commands for more information.


QTor
  QTor  "n"

  Default:  1 (PK-900 default 2)

  Mode: AMTOR

  Host: QT

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    Modem number to be selected when the AMTOR mode is entered.

________________________________________________________________________

QTOR sets the TNC modem that will automatically selected when the AMTOR mode is entered.

See the AMTOR and MODEM commands for more information.


QVpacket
  QVpacket   "n/n"

  Default:  12 (PK-900 default 11/4)

  Mode: Packet

  Host: QV

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    Modem number to be selected when the VHF Packet mode is entered.

________________________________________________________________________

QVPACKET sets the TNC modem that will automatically selected when the VHF Packet mode is entered.  To enter the VHF packet mode, the VHF command must be ON for the selected Radio Port.

See the PACKET and MODEM commands for more information.


QWide
  QWide   "n"

  Default:  7 (Modem 7)

  Mode: WIDESHIFT RTTY

  Host: QW

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    Modem number to be selected when the Wide Shift RTTY mode is entered.

________________________________________________________________________

QWIDE sets the TNC modem that will automatically selected when WIDESHFT is turned ON in a RTTY mode.  This allows a specific modem to be selected (425 or 850 Hz shift)  when WIDESHFT is enabled.

See the WIDESHFT and MODEM commands for more information.


Radio
  Radio   "n1/n2"

  Default: 1/2

  Mode: All

  Host: RA

________________________________________________________________________

"n1"  -    0 or 1 with 0 meaning Radio Port 1 is OFF and 1 meaning it is ON.

"n2"  -    0 to 2 with 0 meaning Radio Port 2 is OFF and 2 meaning it is ON.

________________________________________________________________________

The Radio command allows the user to control whether each of the Radio Ports is enabled.  Sometimes it is desirable to disable one or both of the Radio Ports when operation on that port is not desired.  The RADIO command allows full control by you over operation of each Port.

The first argument controls Radio Port 1. When the first argument is 0 (zero) Radio Port 1 is Disabled.  When this first argument is a 1, Radio Port 1 is enabled.

The second argument controls Radio Port 2. When the second argument is 0, (zero) Radio Port 2 is Disabled.  When the second argument is a 2, Radio Port 2 is enabled.


RBaud
  RBaud   "n"

  Default:  45 bauds (60 WPM)

  Mode: Baudot RTTY

  Host: RB

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    Specifies the Baudot data rate in bauds from the TNC to the radio.

________________________________________________________________________

RBAUD sets the radio ("on-air") baud rate only in the Baudot operating mode. This value has no relationship to your computer or terminal program's baud rate. Available Baudot data rates include 45, 50, 57, 75, 100, 110, 150, 200 and 300 bauds (60, 66, 75, 100, 132, 145, 198, 264 and 396 WPM).

You may use RBAUD UP (RB U) to go to the next highest Baudot speed or RBAUD  DOWN (RB D) to go to the next lowest Baudot speed.


  Rcve

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Baudot, ASCII, AMTOR, PACTOR, Morse and  FAX

  Host: RC

________________________________________________________________________

RCVE is an immediate command, used in MORSE, BAUDOT, ASCII, ARQ, FEC, PACTOR and FAX modes to switch your TNC from transmit to receive.

In Morse, Baudot and ASCII pressing the [image] button on the tool bar places the TNC back into receive.


RECeive
  RECeive   "n"

  Default: $04 <CTRL-D>

  Mode: Baudot, ASCII, Morse, AMTOR, PACTOR and FAX

  Host: RE

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to $7F (0 to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.

________________________________________________________________________

Parameter "n" is the numeric ASCII code for the character you'll use when you want the TNC to return to receive.

The RECEIVE command allows you to insert a character (default <CTRL-D>) in your typed text that will cause the TNC to return to receive after all the text has been transmitted.


REDispla
  REDispla   "n"

  Default: $12 <CTRL-R>

  Mode: All

  Host: RD

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to $7F (0 to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.

________________________________________________________________________

REDISPLA changes the redisplay-line input editing character.

Parameter "n" is the numeric ASCII code for the character you'll use when you want to re-display the current input line. Type the REDISPLA character (default <CTRL-R>) to re-display a command or text line you've just typed. This can be helpful when editing a line especially if your terminal does not support <BACKSPACE>. It can also be used in Packet to display a packet that might have been received while you were typing. A <BACKSLASH> is appended to old line, and the corrected line is shown below it.


REINIT

  Immediate Command

  Mode: All

  Host: RI

________________________________________________________________________

This is an immediate command that a user can invoke to get out of trouble caused by setting a lot of commands, especially timing parameters, to strange values. REINIT can be thought of as being halfway between RESTART and RESET. REINIT re-initializes most of the commands to their default setting, then does a restart. The contents of the MailDrop and the NAVTEX  message history buffers are preserved. The commands that are preserved are:

MYCALL        MYALIAS      MYMAIL       HOMEBBS

MYGATE        MYSELCAL     MYALTCAL     MYIDENT

MYPTCALL      UNPROTO      AWLEN        PARITY

TBAUD         BTEXT        CTEXT        AAB

MDPROMPT      TMPROMPT     CFROM        DFROM

MFROM         MTO          MBX          LASTMSG

MTEXT         NAVSTN       NAVMSG       HOST


RELink
  RELink   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: RL

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   The TNC will try to automatically reconnect the distant station after the link has timed out on retries.

OFF  -  The TNC will not attempt to re-establish the failed link.

________________________________________________________________________

Set RELINK ON if you want the TNC to automatically try to reconnect to a distant packet station if the link fails.


  RESET

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Command

  Host: RS

________________________________________________________________________

RESET is an immediate command that resets all parameters to TNC's PROM default settings and reinitializes the TNC.  All personalized parameters, monitor lists, uploaded RAM DSP modems and MailDrop messages will be lost.


RESptime
  RESptime   "n/n"

  Default: 0/0 (000 msec.)

  Mode: Packet

  Host: RP

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 250 specifies 100-millisecond intervals.

________________________________________________________________________

RESPTIME adds a minimum delay before your TNC sends acknowledgment packets. This delay may run concurrently with the default wait time set by DWAIT and any random wait in effect. RESPTIME may be set for each Radio Port.

During a file transfer, RESPTIME can help avoid data/ack collisions caused by the sending stations TNC pausing briefly between transmitted data frames.


  RESTART

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Command

  Host: RT

________________________________________________________________________

RESTART is an immediate command that reinitializes the TNC while retaining the user's settings.  The effect of the RESTART command is the same as turning the TNC OFF, then ON again.

RESTART does not reset the values in bbRAM.  See the RESET command.


REtry
  REtry   "n/n"

  Default: 10/10

  Mode: Packet

  Host: RY

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 15 specifies the maximum number of packet retries.

________________________________________________________________________

The AX.25 protocol uses the re-transmission of frames that have not been acknowledged as a means to insure that ALL transmitted frames are received. The number of retries that the TNC will attempt is set by the RETRY command (default 10).  If the number of retries is exceeded, the packet link may be lost. The number of retries allowed on each Radio Port may be selected.  The number of times the current packet has been attempted to have sent is shown in the TRIES command.

In PC-Pakratt for Windows, this is shown in the Packet Status window on the tool bar.


RFec
  RFec   ON|OFF

  Default: ON

  Mode: AMTOR

  Host: RF

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   Mode B (FEC) signals are displayed in AMTOR Standby (default).

OFF  -  Mode B (FEC) signals are not displayed in AMTOR Standby.

________________________________________________________________________

Turn the RFEC command OFF to prevent the reception and display of all FEC signals received while in AMTOR Standby.


RFRame
  RFRame   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Baudot and ASCII RTTY

  Host: RG

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   Check received Baudot and ASCII characters for framing errors.

OFF  -  Print received Baudot and ASCII characters regardless of errors.

________________________________________________________________________

When RFRAME is OFF (default), Baudot and ASCII modes operate as always, that is characters are copied based on the presence of the DCD signal.

When RFRAME is ON, the TNC checks received Baudot and ASCII characters for framing errors. A framing error on a character in an asynchronous mode (such as Baudot and ASCII) occurs when the bit in the stop position is detected to be the wrong polarity (the polarity of the start bit is supposed to be space or 0, while the stop bit is supposed to be mark or 1). The unit stops copying characters when 4 out of the last 12 characters had framing errors.  Copy resumes when the most recent 12 characters are error-free. This should significantly reduce the copying of garbage characters when no signals are present. When RFRAME is ON, characters are copied based on the recent history of framing errors.


RXRev
  RXRev   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Baudot and ASCII RTTY/AMTOR

  Host: RX

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    Received data polarity is reversed (mark-space reversal).

OFF  -   Received data polarity is normal.

________________________________________________________________________

Press the RXREV button [image] invert the polarity of the data demodulated from the received mark and space tones.

In some cases, you may be trying to copy a station that's transmitting "upside down" although it is receiving your signals correctly. This is especially true when listening to signals in the Short Wave bands. Set RXREV ON to reverse the data sense of received signals.


SAmple
  SAmple   "n"

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Command

  Host: SA

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    20 to 255 specifies the sampling rate in baud.

________________________________________________________________________

This operating mode is for advanced users interested in decoding unknown synchronous data transmissions. SAMPLE is similar to the 5BIT and 6BIT modes, but operates on synchronous data, whereas 5BIT and 6BIT are used on signals known to be asynchronous.

SAMPLE syncs up on any regularly-paced data transmission received on Radio Port 1 and samples the data once per bit, packaging the data in groups and sending the groups to the user for further analysis.  The user can use SAMPLE to capture data bits from a synchronous transmission, such as FEC, TDM or an "unknown mode" not identified by the SIGNAL command.  The transmission is actually sampled several times per data bit. The TNC does a majority vote on the last few samples to represent the value of the data bit.

One use for the SAMPLE command is to record the output to a disk file, then write a program to analyze the results for synchronous/asynchronous, bit sync patterns, data decoding, etc.

SAMPLE data is captured in 6-bit units; the order of bit reception is MSB first, LSB last. The TNC sends the data unit to the user with a constant of hex 30 added to each unit, the same as the 6BIT command.  The 6-bit unit is a compromise between hexadecimal and 8-bit binary output. The 6-bit unit yields shorter disk files than 4-bit hexadecimal characters, but encounters no interference from terminal communications programs and the TNC's Converse and Command modes.  The 6-bit unit's range of $30-6F falls within the printable ASCII range, allowing the TNC to insert end-of-line carriage returns that can be ignored by the user's analysis software.

To use SAMPLE, set ACRDISP to a non-zero value such as 77. This will break up the recorded disk file into lines. Tune in the signal, set WIDESHFT ON or OFF as needed, and get the transmission rate from the SIGNAL command. Now type "SAMPLE (rate)". As an example, SIGNAL may identify a transmission as 96 baud TDM; in this case type the following:

          SAMPLE 96 <Carriage Return>

Now begin the capture to a disk file with the terminal program.  At the end of the session, edit the disk file and remove any TNC commands that were echoed before or after the received data.

Occasionally SIGNAL will identify a Baudot transmission at a rate that SAMPLE cannot sync up on. This would happen if the Baudot signal had a stop bit duration 1.5 times the data bit duration. In this case, SAMPLE at twice the baud rate and compensate for the doubled data bits in the analysis software.  Note that it might be more useful to let the TNC do the start/stop bit work by using the 5BIT command rather than SAMPLE. 5BIT uses RBAUD, and adds a constant of hex 40 to each 5-bit character received.

Note: RXREV does affect the sense of the SAMPLE data.

      RXREV should however not be changed while capturing data.


SCan
  SCan   ON|OFF/ON|OFF

  Default: OFF/OFF

  Mode: All

  Host: SC

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   The TNC Satellite UP/DOWN Outputs perform a scanning function.

OFF  -  The TNC Satellite UP/DOWN Outputs are subject to the STEP command.

________________________________________________________________________

When SCAN is ON for a given Radio Port of the DSP data controller, the TNC satellite radio stepping outputs are set to perform a scanning function. That is, the TNC will pulse the Radio-UP step output when there has been no channel activity for the period of time set by the STEPREST command. (Be sure lengthen STEPREST from the default of 0.5 sec.)  Channel activity is determined by the state of the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) or the Squelch Input Line if used.

When SCAN is OFF (default), the TNC satellite radio stepping outputs are subject to the STEP command.  Since the default of STEP is also OFF, the radio stepping outputs normally perform no function.

SCAN is handy for use with the AMTOR Mailbox on HF transceivers that have programmable memories.  If the transceiver memory channels are programmed to a number of AMTOR frequencies, the TNC will scan through the frequencies stopping on any frequency it finds to be active.  This way your AMTOR Mailbox can be available on a number of frequencies.

The length of the pulse on the Radio-UP line is set by STEPLEN as it is for the STEP command.

SCAN only operates on the DSP-1232 or DSP-2232 data controllers.


SELfec
  SELfec   aaaa[aaa]

  Immediate Command

  Mode: AMTOR FEC

  Host: SE

________________________________________________________________________

aaaa  -  Specifies the distant station's SELective CALling code (SELCALL).

________________________________________________________________________

Press the SELFEC button [image] in the AMTOR window tool bar to start a SELective FEC (Mode Bs) transmission to a specific distant station when you enter that station's SELCALL (SELective CALLing) code. The SELFEC command must be accompanied by a unique character sequence (aaaa) that contains four or seven alphabetic characters.  You do not have to type the SELCALL a second time if you intend to call the same station again right away.

See MYSELCAL and MYIDENT to enter your 4- and 7-character SELCALLs.  Other AMTOR commands are ACHG, ACRRTTY, ADELAY, ALFRTTY, ARQTMO, EAS, HEREIS and RECEIVE.


SEndpac
  SEndpac   "n"

  Default: $0D <CTRL-M>

  Mode: Packet

  Host: SP

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to $7F (0 to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.

________________________________________________________________________

Use the SENDPAC command to select the character used to cause a packet to be sent in Converse Mode. The parameter "n" is the ASCII code for the character you want to use to force your input to be sent. Use default SENDPAC value $0D for ordinary conversation with ACRPACK ON to send packets at natural intervals.


  SIgnal

  Immediate Command

  Mode:  All

  Host: SI

________________________________________________________________________

SIGNAL is an immediate command that causes the TNC to enter the Signal Identification and Acquisition Mode (SIAM).  The TNC will respond with:

Opmode  was  BAudot

Opmode  now  SIgnal

After a few seconds the TNC will show the signals baud rate. A few seconds later it will identify the signal type.


SLottime
  SLottime   "n/n"

  Default: 30/30 (300 msec.)

  Mode: Packet

  Host: SL

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 250 specifies the time the TNC waits between generating  random numbers to see if it can transmit.

________________________________________________________________________

The SLOTTIME parameter works with the PPERSIST and PERSIST parameters to achieve true p-persistent CSMA (Carrier-Sense Multiple Access) in Packet operation.  The value for each Radio Port defaults to 30 (300 msec.) for VHF operation.

For HF packet operation, a value of 12 is recommended.


SQuelch
  SQuelch   ON|OFF/ON|OFF

  Default: OFF/OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: SQ

________________________________________________________________________

 ON   -    Your TNC responds to positive-going squelch voltage.

 OFF -    Your TNC responds to negative-going squelch voltage.

________________________________________________________________________

Normally, your TNC uses its CSMA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access) circuit to decide whether or not it is clear to transmit on a packet channel. If there are non-packet signals on the channel you're using (such as voice), you will want to use true RF-carrier CSMA by monitoring the squelch line voltage from your radio.

If SQUELCH is OFF (default) for a particular Radio port, the TNC inhibits transmissions when there is a POSITIVE voltage on the Radio connectors squelch input line. When there is no voltage or NO CONNECTION to this pin, the TNC allows packets to be sent.

When SQUELCH is ON, the TNC will inhibit packet transmissions when there is 0 volts applied to the squelch input pin on the appropriate Radio connector.


SRXall
  SRXall   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: AMTOR

  Host: SR

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    Receive ALL selective (SELFEC) transmissions.

OFF -    Receive only SELCALL-addressed SELFEC transmissions.

________________________________________________________________________

SRXALL permits the reception of selectively coded inverse FEC signals normally not available for decoding. Set SRXALL ON to activate this feature on Radio Port 1.


STep
  STep   ON|OFF/ON|OFF

  Default: ON/OFF

  Mode: Packet (Satellite)

  Host: SB

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   The TNC Satellite UP/DOWN Outputs perform a stepping function.

OFF  -  The TNC Satellite UP/DOWN Outputs are inactive.

________________________________________________________________________

When STEP is ON, the TNC DSP satellite radio stepping outputs are set to perform a stepping function.  That is, the TNC will pulse the Radio Step UP or Step DOWN outputs when the DSP satellite modem reports a frequency error greater than STEPSIZE.  When this occurs, either the Radio Step UP or Step DOWN output is active for the period of time set by STEPLEN, then inactive for the time set by STEPREST. This allows the TNC to control a receiver to track the Doppler shift of a satellite as it passes overhead.

When STEP is OFF, the TNC satellite radio stepping outputs are inactive. For Satellite frequency correcting Stepping operation, be sure that the command SCAN is OFF as it takes precedence over the STEP command.  STEP defaults ON for Radio Port 1 which is recommended for satellite operation. On Radio Port 2, STEP defaults to OFF.

STEP only operates on the DSP-1232 or DSP-2232 data controllers.


STEPLen
  STEPLen   "n/n"

  Default: 25/25 (250 msec.)

  Mode: All

  Host: SV

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 250 specifies 10-millisecond intervals.

________________________________________________________________________

STEPLEN sets the Satellite Step output's active time for each Radio Port. This is the time in which the UP and DOWN outputs are shorted to ground causing the frequency of the radio receiver to step one unit.

The default for both Radio Ports is 250 msec.

See the SCAN, STEP, STEPREST, STEPSIZE and STEPUP commands which are important to Radio stepping operation.

STEPLEN only operates on the DSP-1232 or DSP-2232 data controllers.


STEPRest
  STEPRest   "n/n"

  Default: 5/5 (500 msec.)

  Mode: All

  Host: SF

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 250 specifies 100-millisecond intervals.

________________________________________________________________________

STEPREST sets the Satellite Step output's inactive time for each Radio Port.

When SCAN in ON, STEPREST is the time in which the TNC will wait for the DCD or Squelch input to go "Active" before moving the transceiver to the next memory frequency.

When SCAN is OFF and STEP is ON, STEPREST is the minimum time TNC will wait before stepping the receiver's frequency when the frequency error from a satellite modem is greater than STEPSIZE.

The default for both Radio Ports is 5 (500 msec).

STEPREST only operates on the DSP-1232 or DSP-2232 data controllers.


STEPSize
 STEPSize   "n/n"

 Default: 10/10

 Mode: Packet (Satellite)

 Host: SZ

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 250 specifies 1 Hz intervals.

________________________________________________________________________

STEPSIZE sets the size of each tuning step used by a satellite receiver. This value must be set correctly for the receiver or transceiver being used to receive a satellite.  Check the value used by your satellite receiver and set STEPSIZE accordingly.

The default value is 10 Hz.

See the STEP, STEPLEN, STEPREST, and STEPUP commands which are important to Radio stepping operation.

STEPSIZE only operates on the DSP-1232 or DSP-2232 data controllers.


STEPUp
  STEPUp   ON|OFF/ON|OFF

  Default: ON/ON

  Mode: Packet (Satellite)

  Host: SU

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   The TNC increase receiver frequency in response to a negative  frequency error from a satellite modem.

OFF -   The TNC decreases receiver frequency in response to a negative frequency error from a satellite modem.

________________________________________________________________________

When STEPUP is ON (default), the TNC satellite radio stepping outputs will "Step-UP" or increase the receiver's frequency when a satellite modem reports that the received audio frequency is low. When STEPUP is OFF, the TNC satellite radio stepping outputs will Step-DOWN or decrease the receiver's frequency when a satellite modem reports a negative frequency error greater than STEPSIZE.

See the STEP, STEPLEN, STEPREST, and STEPSIZE commands which are important to Radio stepping operation.

STEPUP only operates on the DSP-1232 or DSP-2232 data controllers.


TBaud
  TBaud   "n"

  Default: 1200

  Mode: All

  Host: TB

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    Specifies the data rate in bauds, on the RS-232 serial I/O port.

________________________________________________________________________

TBAUD sets the baud rate you are using to  communicate with the TNC from PC-Pakratt for Windows.  TBaud is set in the program configuration menu and is specific for each TNC.

If you are using your TNC with other programs, make sure that the baud rates used are the same.  It also helps to use a Word length of 8 (AWLEN 8) and no parity (PARITY 0).  PC-Pakratt for Windows attempts to use the highest baud rate supported.  With the PK-232, PC-Pakratt for windows will attempt to use 9600 baud as a default.  With all other TNCs 19200 baud will be used as a default.


  TClear

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Command

  Host: TC

________________________________________________________________________

In PC-Pakratt for windows press the [image] button to issue a TCLEAR command to the TNC.

The TCLEAR command clears your TNC's transmit buffer on the "Logical Channel" you have selected and cancels any further transmission of data when in the Baudot, ASCII, AMTOR, PACTOR or Morse operating modes. In Packet Mode, all data is cleared except for a few remaining packets.


TDBaud
  TDBaud   "n"

  Default: 96

  Mode: TDM

  Host: TU

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    Specifies the data rate in bauds of the TDM signal you are receiving.

________________________________________________________________________

The default value of n is 96. TDB can be set to 0-200, but only some of these are legal values:

                1-channel:  48,  72,  96

                2-channel:  86,  96, 100

                4-channel: 171, 192, 200

No error checking is done for values other than above.  Bad values result in an internal TDBAUD of 96.


TDChan
  TDChan   "n"

  Default: 0

  Mode: TDM

  Host: TN

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -   Specifies the TDM channel number.

________________________________________________________________________

"n" selects which data channel (default 0) to separate out from the multiplexed TDM signal.  n can be set to 0-3, but only some of these have unique effects:

    1-channel:	No effect.

   2-channel: 	0 and 2 show Channel A.

               	1 and 3 show Channel B.

  4-channel:	0 shows Channel A.

               	1 shows Channel B.

               	2 shows Channel C.

              	3 shows Channel D.


  TDm

  Immediate Command

  Mode: TDM

  Host: TV

________________________________________________________________________

TDM is an immediate command that places Radio Port 1 of the TNC in the TDM receive mode.  TDM stands for Time Division Multiplexing, also known as Moore code and is the implementation of CCIR Recommendation 342.

Use the TNC SIGNAL command first to determine the bit rate and to make sure that the signal is actually TDM.  The SIGNAL command can detect one or two channel TDM transmissions.

The TDM command forces bit phasing; do this when changing frequency to another TDM signal.  This is also useful when the TNC synchronizes on the wrong bit in the character stream, which is likely on a signal which is idling.

TDM stations idle MOST of the time, so you may have to leave the TNC monitoring for an hour or two before any data is received.


TIme
  TIme   "n"

  Default: $14 <CTRL-T>

  Mode: All

  Host: TM

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -   0 to $7F (0 to 127 decimal) specifies an ASCII character code.

________________________________________________________________________

The TIME command specifies which control character sends the time-of-day in the text you type into the transmit buffer or into a text file stored on disk.

At transmit time, the TNC reads the embedded control code (default <CTRL-T>), reads the time-of-day from the TNC's internal clock and then sends the time to the radio in the data transmission code in use at that time. If the DAYTIME has not been set, and a control-T will cause the TNC to send an asterisk (*). When DAYSTAMP is set ON, the date is transmitted with the time.

NOTE:  The TIME command cannot be embedded in CTEXT, BTEXT, MTEXT, or AAB.


TMail
  TMail   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: AMTOR and PACTOR

  Host: TL

________________________________________________________________________

ON    -  The TNC operates as a personal AMTOR or PACTOR BBS or Mail Drop.

OFF  -  The TNC only operates as a normal CCIR 476 or 625 controller.

________________________________________________________________________

Press the [image] button on the AMTOR or PACTOR tool bar to enable the MailDrop.

The TNC's Mail Drop is a personal mailbox that uses a subset of the W0RLI/WA7MBL PBBS commands and is similar to operation of APLINK stations.  When TMAIL is ON and another station establishes an ARQ link with your MYSELCAL or MYIDENT, the remote AMTOR, or PACTOR  station may leave messages for you or read messages from you.  Third-party messages are not accepted by your AMTOR Mail Drop unless 3RDPARTY is ON.

See the MDCHECK, TMPROMPT, MDMON, MTEXT, and MMSG commands.


TMPrompt
  TMPrompt   text

  Default: (see text)

  Mode: AMTOR/Mail Drop

  Host: Tp

________________________________________________________________________

text  -    Any combination of characters and spaces up to a maximum of 80 bytes.

________________________________________________________________________

TMPROMPT is the command line sent to a calling station by your AMTOR Mail Drop in response to a Send message command.  The default text is:

GA subj/GA msg, '/EX' to end."

Text before the first slash is sent to the user as the subject prompt; text after the slash is sent as the message text prompt. If there is no slash in the text, the subject prompt is "SUBJECT:" and the text prompt is from TMPROMPT.


TONE
  TONE   "n"

  Default: 3 (Bell 202)

  Mode: Packet

  Host: T0

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 3 specifies an ASCII transmit and receive modem tones.

________________________________________________________________________

The TONE commands et the AM7910 Modem chip's send and receive tones and shift. Two sets of different modem tone combinations are available:

TONE	Spec.	Mark	  Space	Type

  0	Bell 103 org	1070 Hz	  1270 Hz	HF 300 Baud

  1	Bell 103 ans	2025 Hz	  2225 Hz	HF 200 Baud

  2	Bell 202	  1200 Hz	2200 Hz	VHF 1200 Baud

  3	Bell 202 Eq	1200 Hz	  2200 Hz	VHF 1200 Baud

TONE 3 provides a significant degree of frequency response equalization in the mode receiver. TONE 3 may be beneficial when working with radio receivers who's high frequency audio response is less than adequate.

In general practice, use Bell 103 tones at the lower data rates for HF radio, and Bell 202 tones for higher data rates authorized above 28 MHz.

Note that the PK-88 is shipped strapped for the Bell standard tones used in North America.

TONE only operates on the PK-88 and PCB-88 TNCs.


TRACe
  TRACe   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet/FAX/Baudot/AMTOR/Analog/PACTOR

  Host: TR

________________________________________________________________________

Packet:

The TRACE command activates the AX.25 protocol display.  When TRACE is ON all received frames are displayed in their entirety, including all header information.  The TRACE display is shown as it appears on an 80-column display.  The following monitored frame is a sample:

W2JUP*>TESTER <UI>:

This is a test message packet.

Byte                                Hex       Shifted ASCII                  ASCII

000: A88AA6A8  8AA460AE  6494AAA0  406103F0   TESTER0W2JUP 0.x    ......`.d...@a..

010: 54686973  20697320  61207465  7374206D   *449.49.0.:29:.6    This is a test m

020: 65737361  67652070  61636B65  742E0D     299032.80152:..     essage packet...

The byte column shows the offset into the packet of the first byte of the line.  The hex display column shows the next 16 bytes of the packet, exactly as received, in standard hex format.  The shifted ASCII column decodes the high-order seven bits of each byte as an ASCII character code.  The ASCII column decodes the low-order seven bits of each byte as an ASCII character code.

FAX and Analog:

When Operating in FAX mode, TRACE is ON, and PRFAX is OFF, the graphics escape sequences and data bytes are sent to the terminal with each byte expanded to two Hexadecimal characters.  This helps get around the limitations of many terminal programs that do not allow 8-bit data to be saved to disk as an ASCII file.

Interspersed command prompts and even the L and R commands would have no effect on the final data and it could be translated back to binary data with a computer program.


  Trans

  Immediate Command

  Mode: All

  Host: Not Supported

________________________________________________________________________

TRANS is an immediate command that switches the TNC switch from the Command Mode to Transparent Mode. The current state of the radio link is not affected.

Transparent Mode is primarily useful for computer communications. In Transparent Mode "human interface" features such as input editing, echoing of input characters, and type-in flow control are disabled.

o    Use Transparent Mode for transferring binary or other non-text files.

o    To exit the Transparent mode, type the COMMAND character (default <CTRL-C>) three times within the time period set by CMDTIME (default 1 Second).


TRFlow
  TRFlow   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: All

  Host: TW

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -	Software flow control for the computer or terminal RECEIVING 	data is activated in Transparent Mode.

OFF  - 	Software flow control for the computer or terminal RECEIVING 	data is disabled in Transparent Mode.

________________________________________________________________________________

When TRFLOW is ON, the type of flow control used by the computer RECEIVING data in Transparent Mode is determined by how START and STOP are set.

When TRFLOW is OFF, only "hardware" flow control (RTS, DTR) is available to the computer RECEIVING data from the TNC in Transparent Mode.

If TRFLOW is ON, and START and STOP are set to values other than zero, software flow control is enabled for the user's computer or terminal.  The TNC responds to the user START and user STOP characters while remaining transparent to all other characters from the terminal.


TRIes
  TRIes   "n"

  Default: 0

  Mode: Packet

  Host: TI

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    0 to 15 specifies the current RETRY level on the selected input   channel.

________________________________________________________________________

TRIES retrieves (or forces) the count of "retry counter" on the data channel presently selected.

If you type TRIES without an argument, the TNC returns the current number of tries if an outstanding unacknowledged frame exists.  If no outstanding unacknowledged frame exists, the TNC returns the number of tries required to get an ACK for the previous frame.

If you type TRIES with an argument the "tries" counter is forced to the entered value.  Using this command to force a new count of tries is not recommended.


TXdelay
  TXdelay   "n/n"

  Default: 30/30 (300 msec.)

  Mode: Packet, Baudot and ASCII

  Host: TD

_____________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 120 specifies ten-millisecond intervals.

_____________________________________________________________

The TXDELAY command tells your TNC how long to wait before sending packet frame data after keying your transmitter's PTT line. All transmitters need some amount of start-up time to put a signal on the air.  This parameter should be set separately for Radio Port 1 and Radio Port 2 since it is unlikely that the radio transmitters on each port will require exactly the same amount of key-up time. The default value of 300 msec is a good starting point should work with almost all transceivers.

In fact many of the newer transceivers can use smaller TXDELAY values. Crystal controlled transceivers can often use smaller values as well.  On the other hand, tube-type transceivers and amplifiers can require a longer time to switch and may require TXDELAY to be increased. Experiment with the value to determine the shortest setting you can use in reliably in Packet.

Baudot and ASCII use TXDELAY between PTT ON and the start of transmitted data.


TXFlow
  TXFlow   "n/n"

  Default: 30/30 (300 msec.)

  Mode: Packet, Baudot and ASCII

  Host: TD

____________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   Software flow control for the TNC is active in Transparent Mode.

OFF  -  Software flow control for the TNC is disabled in Transparent Mode.

________________________________________________________________________________

When TXFLOW is ON, the setting of XFLOW determines the type of flow control used in Transparent Mode by the TNC to control TRANSMITTED data.  When TXFLOW is OFF, the TNC uses only hardware flow control to control TRANSMITTED data; all data sent to the terminal remains fully transparent.

When TXFLOW and XFLOW are ON, the TNC uses the Start and Stop characters (set by XON and XOFF) to control the input from the computer.


TXRev
  TXRev   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Baudot/ASCII/AMTOR/PACTOR

  Host: TX

________________________________________________________________________

ON    -    Transmit data polarity is reversed (mark-space reversal).

OFF  -    Transmit data polarity is normal.

________________________________________________________________________________

Use the TXREV command to reverse the mark and space in the transmitted AFSK and FSK signals.

In PC-Pakratt for windows, press the [image] button to activate the TXREV feature.

In some cases, the station you're working may be receiving inverted data although it is transmitting in correct polarity.  Set TXREV ON to reverse the sense of your transmitted signals.


UBit
  UBit   "n" ON/OFF

  Default: 0

  Mode: All

  Host: UB

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 255 specifying a User BIT that may be set ON or OFF.

________________________________________________________________________

The UBIT is an extension of the old CUSTOM command which allows up to 255 ON/OFF functions to be added to the TNC without burdening users with a large number of commands.  The functions controlled by UBIT are things that most users will never have to change.  Still they are important enough to some users or application programs that we have included them under the umbrella command UBIT.

The following are examples of how to use the UBIT command:

 UBIT 5     Returns the present status of UBIT 5

 UBIT 1 ON  Sets the function controlled by UBIT 1 to ON

 UBIT 10 T  Toggles the state of UBIT 10

 UBIT       Returns the state of the last UBIT value that was accessed

Listed below are the UBIT functions and the default state that presently have been assigned.  The default state of each UBIT is always shown first.

UBIT 0:

ON:  The TNC will discard a received packets in Packet or PACTOR if the signal is too  weak to light the DCD LED.

OFF: The TNC will receive packets regardless of the DCD status.

UBIT 1:

OFF: Entering the command MONITOR ON or MONITOR YES causes the MONITOR command to be set to 4.

ON:  Entering the command MONITOR ON or MONITOR YES causes the MONITOR  command to be set to 6.

UBIT 2:

ON:  A Break signal received on the RS-232 line forces the TNC into Command mode from all modes except HOST mode.

OFF: A Break signal on the RS-232 line is ignored by the TNC.

UBIT 3:

ON:  Logical packet channels on radio port 2 may be selected by either a-z (lower case) or A-Z (UPPER CASE) letters.

OFF: Logical packet channels on radio port 2 must be selected by A-Z (UPPER CASE) letters.  Attempting to use lower case characters gives the "Must be 0-9 or A-Z" error message.

UBIT 4:

ON:  When transmitting in Baudot, the TNC inserts the FIGS after a space just prior to sending any figures (<space><FIGS><number>). This permits receiving stations to decode groups of figures  correctly regardless of the USOS, setting

OFF: The TNC will not insert the FIGS character after each space. MARS operators may want to set UBIT 4 OFF for literal operation.

UBIT 5:

OFF: The TNC will always power up in Command Mode.

ON:  The TNC will remain in the last mode (Converse, Command or Transparent) provided the battery jumper enabled.

UBIT 6:

OFF: In Packet, monitoring is disabled when in the Transparent mode.

ON:  Packet monitoring is active in the Transparent mode.  MFROM, MTO, MRPT, MONITOR, MCON, MPROTO, MSTAMP, MXMIT, CONSTAMP and MBX are  all active.

UBIT 7:

OFF: In Morse receive, the character ..-- prints as a "^".

ON:  In Morse, the character ..-- prints as a <Carriage Return>.

UBIT 8:

OFF:  In the Morse mode, the PK-232's modem is configured for standard A1-A single-tone ON/OFF keyed Morse.

ON:   In the Morse mode, the PK-232's modem is configured for 2-tone FSK Morse operation on both transmit and receive.  WIDESHFT, RXREV and TXREV are all active.

UBIT 9:

ON:  In AMTOR or PACTOR a received WRU character (FIGS-D) will cause the Auto- Answer back text to be sent regardless of the setting of WRU. This is subject to the setting of the CODE command.

OFF: In AMTOR a received WRU character (FIGS-D) will have no effect.

UBIT 10:

OFF: Polling in the HOST mode is subject to HPOLL and must be done for all changes in status.

ON:  Status changes (e.g. Idle to Tfc) in AMTOR, PACTOR, FAX, TDM or NAVTEX  causes the TNC to issue the following host block:  SOH  $50  n  ETB, where n is $30-36, the same number that the OPMODE command furnishes. This block is subject to HPOLL.

UBIT 11:

ON:  A "Connected" message appears when an ARQ link is first established using seven-character SELCALLs (CCIR 625).

OFF: No Connected message appears at the start of ARQ communications.

UBIT 12:

OFF: The Packet Morse ID (MID) is ON/OFF keying of the low tone.

ON:  The Packet Morse ID is sent in 2-tone FSK with the low tone being  key-down and the high tone representing key-up.  Use this setting to keep other stations from sending a packet during the Morse ID.

UBIT 13:

OFF: Mail Drop Connect status messages are always sent to the local user, regardless of the setting of MDMON.

ON:  Remote user dialog and Connect status messages with the Mail Drop are shown only if MDMON is ON.

UBIT 14:

OFF: In Packet, the transmit buffer for data sent from the computer to the TNC is limited only by available TNC memory.

ON:  In Packet, the serial flow control will permit only a maximum of 7 I-frames to be held by the TNC before transmission.  This  solves a problem with the YAPP binary file transfer program which relies on a small TNC transmit buffer to operate correctly.

UBIT 15:

Not used in the TNC.

UBIT 16:

Not used in the TNC.

UBIT 17:  OFF: Morse, Baudot, ASCII, AMTOR and PACTOR transmissions start when commanded by the user or an application program.

ON:  Morse, Baudot, ASCII, AMTOR and PACTOR transmissions will not begin  until the channel is clear of signals.  The channel is  considered clear when both the DCD and the Squelch input (if used) are inactive. The PERSIST and SLOTTIME delay functions are used if PPERSIST is ON, otherwise the DWAIT time is used.

UBIT 18:

OFF: In Packet operation, the FRACK (or FRICK if enabled) timer is  used to retry packets that were not acknowledged.

ON:  An experimental Master/Slave relationship is established when a Packet connection is made.  This is designed for meteor scatter operation and is described in detail under the FRICK command.

UBIT 19:

ON:  The "p1" and "p2" radio port designators are shown ahead of monitored data on each radio port.

OFF: The "p1" and "p2" radio port designators are not displayed.

UBIT 20:

OFF: In the Analog receive mode, each 8 bit sample is sent to the computer as an 8 bit byte of data.

ON:  In the Analog receive mode, each 8 bit sample is truncated to the 4 Most Significant bits.  Two 4 bit samples are then packed together to form an 8 bit byte before being sent to the computer.

UBIT 21:

OFF: When DSPDATA is ON, data is sent and received on the serial port.

ON:  When DSPDATA is ON, data is transferred on the parallel port.

UBIT 22:

ON:  In the Packet mode, the TNC will respond to the receipt of an UNPROTO frame addressed to QRA by sending an UNPROTO ID packet frame within 1 to 10 seconds.  This feature is compatible with TAPR's ANSWRQRA command.

OFF: The TNC does not respond to UNPROTO frames addressed to QRA.

UBIT settings 23 and above are unused at the present time but are reserved for future expansion.

PPWIN sets UBIT 19 off. UBIT 19 can be turned on in Dumb Terminal mode, but PPWIN will turn UBIT 19 off when leaving the Dumb Terminal Mode.


UCmd
  UCmd   "n x"

  Default: 0

  Mode: PACTOR

  Host: UC

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 15 specifying a User BYTE that may be set.

"x"  -    0 to 255 specifying the value of the specific byte to be set.

________________________________________________________________________

The UCMD is an extension of the UBIT command which allows up to 15 commands  that take numeric arguments to be added to the TNC without burdening users with a large number of commands.  The functions controlled by UCMD are things that most users will never have to change.  Still they are important enough to some users or application programs that we have included them under the umbrella command UCMD.

The following are examples of how to use the UCMD command:

     UCMD 2	Returns the present status of UCMD 2.

     UCMD 4 5	Sets user command 4 to the value 5.

     UCMD 12 OFF	Sets user command 12 to the value of 0.

     UCMD ON	Restores user command 8 to its default value.

     UCMD	Shows the setting of the last UCMD entered.

Listed below are the UCMD functions and the default states that presently have been assigned.  The default state of each UCMD is always shown first.

UCMD 0:   This is a PACTOR command.  It sets the number of correct packets in a row that must be received before generating an automatic request to change from 100 to 200 baud.  See PTUP when using PC-Pakratt for Windows.

UCMD 1:   This is a PACTOR command.  It sets the number of incorrect packets in a row that must be received before generating an automatic request to change from 200 to 100 baud.  See PTDOWN when using PC-Pakratt for Windows.

UCMD 2:   This is a PACTOR command.  It sets the number of packets sent in a speed-up attempt.  See PTTRIES when using PC-Pakratt for Windows.

UCMD 3:   This is a PACTOR command.  It sets the maximum number of Memory ARQ packets that are combined to form one good packet.  When this number is exceeded, all stored packets are cleared and Memory ARQ is re-initialized.  See PTSUM when using PC-Pakratt for Windows.

UCMD 4-15 are unused for now.


Unproto
  Unproto   call1 [VIA call2[,call3...,call9]] / call1 [VIA call2[,call3...,call9]]

  Default: CQ/CQ

  Mode: Packet

  Host: UN

________________________________________________________________________

call1     -    Call sign to be placed in the TO address field.

call2-9  -    Optional digipeater call list, up to eight calls.

________________________________________________________________________

UNPROTO sets the digipeat and destination address fields of packets sent in the unconnected (unprotocol) mode for each radio port.

Unconnected packets are sent as Unnumbered I-frames (UI frames) with the destination and digipeat fields taken from "call1" through "call9" options. When a destination is not specified, unconnected packets are sent to "CQ."

Unconnected packets sent from other packet stations can be monitored by setting MONITOR to a value greater than "1" and setting MFROM to ALL.

The UNPROTO path and address is also used for beacon packets.


USers
  USers   "n/n"

  Default: 1/1

  Mode: Packet

  Host: UR

________________________________________________________________________

"n"  -    0 to 10 specifies the number of active simultaneous connections that can be established with your TNC.

________________________________________________________________________

USERS affects the way that incoming connect requests are handled (on each Radio Port 1 ) of the TNC. It does not affect the number of connections you initiate with your TNC. For example:

USERS 0   allows incoming connections on any free logical channel

USERS 1   rejects incoming connections if there are connections on 1 or more logical channels.

USERS 2   rejects incoming connections if there are connections on 2 or more logical channels.

     And so on, through USERS 10.


USOs
  USOs   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Baudot RTTY, AMTOR Listen

  Host: US

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   Letters (LTRS) case IS forced after receiving a space character.

OFF -   Letters (LTRS) is NOT forced after receiving a space character.

________________________________________________________________________

Use the USOS Command (UnShift On Space) when you want your TNC to automatically change from figures to letters after receiving a space character.

When using Baudot RTTY in poor HF receiving conditions, a received character can be incorrectly interpreted as a FIGURES-SHIFT character, forcing the received data into the wrong case. Many otherwise good characters received after this will be interpreted as figures (numbers and punctuation), not as the letters sent by the distant station. USOS ON helps reduce these receiving errors.


Vhf
  Vhf   ON|OFF/ON|OFF

  Default: ON/ON

  Mode: Packet

  Host: VH

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -   The modem and HBAUD rate selected in QVPacket are automatically selected.

OFF  -  The modem and HBAUD rate selected in QHPacket are automatically selected.

________________________________________________________________________

Use the VHF Command for immediate software control of the TNC's modem selection and HBAUD data rate. This command makes changing between HF and VHF packet modems and data rates on each radio port easier.

Set VHF ON for VHF packet operation (default) and set VHF OFF for HF operation.


WIdeshft
  WIdeshft   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Baudot/ASCII RTTY/AMTOR/PACTOR

  Host: WI

________________________________________________________________________

ON    -   RTTY tones are shifted 1000 Hz.

OFF  -   RTTY tones are shifted 200 Hz (emulates 170-Hz shift).

________________________________________________________________________

Pressing the [image] button enables the WIDESHFT command.  When the modem in the TNC is in WIDESHFT, the button looks like [image].

The WIDESHFT command permits the use of the TNC on VHF and HF with either wide (1000 Hz) or narrow (200 Hz) shifts. Many amateur radio VHF and HF RTTY operators use 170-shifts. The TNC's 200 Hz shift is well within the filter tolerances of any RTTY demodulator in general service. MARS stations will find WIDESHIFT generally compatible with MARS and Commercial 850-shift RTTY operations.  See the QWIDE command.


WHYnot
  WHYnot   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Packet

  Host: WN

________________________________________________________________________

ON    -  The TNC generates a reason why received packets are not displayed.

OFF   - This function is disabled.

________________________________________________________________________

During packet operation, the TNC may receive many packets that are not displayed. Turning WHYNOT on will cause the TNC to display a message explaining the reason the received packet was not displayed to the screen.

The messages and their meanings are shown below:

PASSALL: The received packet frame had errors, and PASSALL was off, preventing the packet from being displayed to the screen.

DCD Threshold: The DCD LED was off when the packet was received.

MONITOR: The MONITOR value was set too low to receive this frame.

MCON: MCON was set too low to receive this type of frame.

MPROTO: MPROTO was set to off, and the received packet was probably a NET/ROM or TCP/IP frame.

MFROM/MTO: The frame was blocked by the MFROM or MTO command.

MBX: The call sign of the sending station does not match the call sign setting in the MBX command.

MBX Sequence: The frame was received out of sequence, probably a retry.

Frame too long: Incoming packet frame longer than 330 bytes.  Probably a non-AX.25 frame.

Frame too short: Incoming packet frame shorter than 15 bytes.  Only seen if PASSALL ON.  Probably noise.

RX overrun: Another HDLC byte was received before we could read the previous one out of the HDLC chip.


WOrdout
  WOrdout   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Baudot, ASCII, AMTOR, PACTOR and Morse

  Host: WO

________________________________________________________________________

ON  -    Typed characters are held in the transmit buffer until a space, CR, LF, TAB, RECEIVE, CWID, ENQ or +? character(s) is typed.

OFF -   Typed characters are sent directly to the transmitter.

________________________________________________________________________

Use the WORDOUT Command to choose whether or not you can edit while entering text for transmission.

When WORDOUT is ON, each character you type is held in a buffer until you type a space, a carriage return, a line feed, ENQ character ($05, <CTRL-E>) or the +?.  You can edit words before the transmit buffer's contents are sent to the radio.

When WORDOUT is OFF, each character you type is sent to the radio just as you typed it, without any delay.

PPWIN sets WORDOUT to OFF. WORDOUT may be set in Dumb Terminal Mode but PPWIN will turn WORDOUT OFF when leaving the Dumb Terminal mode.

PPWIN has it's own version of WORDOUT. In Packet, data is not sent to the TNC until a SENDPAC character is typed. In AMTOR, PACTOR, BAUDOT, ASCII and MORSE data is not sent to the TNC until a control character, space or a ? is typed or if the # of characters types exceeds the value of XLENGHT.


WRu
  WRu   ON|OFF

  Default: OFF

  Mode: Baudot, ASCII

  Host: WR

________________________________________________________________________

ON    -  Your Auto-AnswerBack is sent after a distant station's WRU?

OFF  -  Your Auto-AnswerBack is NOT sent after a distant station's WRU?

________________________________________________________________________

To enable WRU in PC-Pakratt for windows, press the [image] button on the tool bar.

Use the WRU command in Baudot and ASCII to enable or disable your TNC's Automatic-AnswerBack feature.

When WRU is ON, your TNC sends the AnswerBack on receipt of a distant station's WRU? request ("FIGS-D" or "$" in Baudot or a <CTRL-E> in ASCII).

Your TNC keys your transmitter, sends the text stored in the AnswerBack field (AAB ), then un-keys your transmitter and returns to receive.

The WRU function is defaulted ON in AMTOR as per the CCIR recommendation.

To allow for special applications where it may be helpful to disable the WRU function in AMTOR, User Bit 9 (UBIT 9) command controls this feature.


XBaud
  XBaud   "n"

  Default: 0

  Mode: ASCII/Baudot

  Host: XB

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -    Specifies an exact baud rate used in receiving ASCII and Baudot RTTY.

________________________________________________________________________

XBAUD enables hardware decoding of ASCII and Baudot signals using the TNC's 8530 Serial Communications Controller IC. This can allow the TNC to achieve better copy of these signals as well as allow non-standard data rates to be received.

To use XBAUD simply enter the data rate that is desired in either ASCII or Baudot modes.  For example a 20-meter Baudot RTTY enthusiast may want to set XBAUD to 45 to improve copy of weaker signals on the band.

It is important to remember that XBAUD overrides both the RBAUD (in Baudot) and ABAUD (in ASCII) as well as the inverting commands TXREV and RXREV.  This means that if XBAUD has been set to 45 for Baudot operation, it should be reset to 0 before changing modes to ASCII. Otherwise the TNC will attempt to receive ASCII at 45 bauds!  To help reduce the chance of this error occurring, the TNC will disable XBAUD by setting it to 0 every time the SIGNAL Identification mode is used and the command OK is entered.

The XBAUD command supports data rates from 1 to 9600 bits per second although the TNC internal modem only supports data rates to 1200 baud.


XFlow
  XFlow   ON|OFF

  Default: ON

  Mode: All

  Host: XW

________________________________________________________________________

ON    -    XON/XOFF (software) flow control is activated.

OFF  -    XON/XOFF flow control is disabled - hardware flow control is enabled.

________________________________________________________________________________

When XFLOW is ON, software flow control is in effect - it's assumed that the computer or terminal will respond to the TNC's Start and Stop characters defined by the XON and XOFF commands.  Similarly, the TNC will respond to the computers start and stop characters defined by START and STOP.

When XFLOW is OFF, the TNC sends hardware flow control commands via the CTS line and is controlled via either the RTS or the DTR line.


XGateway
 XGateway   ON|OFF

  Default: ON

  Mode: Packet,AMTOR and PACTOR

  Host: XG

________________________________________________________________________

ON    -    Stations connecting to the callsign MYGATE can cross-connect to the other radio port.

OFF  -    Stations connecting to the callsign in MYGATE do not have access to the other radio port.

________________________________________________________________________________

The XGATEWAY command only is available in dual port products (DSP-2232 and PK-900).

XGATEWAY must be enabled (turned ON) to allow cross-port connections. The GATEWAY user PORT command  (GUSERS) must be enabled in order to accomplish this.


XLENGTH
  XLENGTH  "n"

  Default: 64

  Mode: AMTOR, PACTOR, Baudot, ASCII and Morse

  Host: Not Applicable

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -   The maximum number of characters that can be typed before the data will be sent to the TNC..

________________________________________________________________________

"n" specifies the number of characters (other than control characters, a space and a ?) that can be typed before the data is sent to the TNC. If "n" has not been reached, the data can be edited using the <BackSpace> key.

PPWIN normally sends data to the whenever a control character, a space or a ? is typed or if the value of XLENGTH has been exceeded.

For contesting, "n" should be set to 0 so characters are sent to the TNC as they are typed.

XLENGHT is unique to PPWIN and PC-Pakratt for Windows.

See also PACLEN.


  Xmit

  Immediate Command

  Mode: Baudot/ASCII/Morse and FAX

  Host: XM

________________________________________________________________________

XMIT is an immediate command that keys your radio's PTT line on Radio Port 1 and prepares the radio to receive outbound data and Morse characters from the TNC.

Pressing the [image] button on the PC-Pakratt for windows tool bar switches your TNC to either Converse or Transparent Mode, depending on the setting of CONMODE.  Typing the CWID or the RECEIVE character will return you to receive. Typing RCVE from the Command mode will also return to receive.

The XMIT Command can only be used from the Command Mode.


XMITOk
  XMITOk   ON|OFF

  Default: ON

  Mode: All

  Host: XO

________________________________________________________________________

ON   -    Transmit functions (PTT line) are active.

OFF -    Transmit functions (PTT line) are disabled.

________________________________________________________________________

When XMITOK is OFF, the PTT lines to your transmitter on both Radio Ports are disabled - the transmit function is inhibited. All other TNC functions remain the same.  Your TNC generates and sends packets as requested, but does not key the radio's PTT line.

Use the XMITOK command to ensure that your TNC does not transmit.

Turning XMITOK OFF can be used to enable full break-in CW operation (QSK) on certain transceivers.


PACKET Parameters

8BITCONV   CPACTIME    MDIGI       RADIO      XMITOK

ACKPRIOR   CSTATUS     MDMON       RELINK

ACRPACK    CTEXT       MFILTER     RESPTIME

ALFPACK    DAYSTAMP    MFROM       RETRY

ALTMODEM   DCDCONN     MHEARD      SCAN

AUDELAY    DFROM       MID         SENDPAC

AX25L2V2   DIRECT      MODEM       SLOTTIME

AXDELAY    DISCONNE    MONITOR     SQUELCH

AXHANG     DWAIT       MPROTO      STEP

BBSMSGS    FRACK       MRPT        STEPLEN

BEACON     FRICK       MSTAMP      STEPREST

BTEXT      FULLDUP     MTO         STEPSIZE

CASEDISP   GUSERS      MXMIT       STEPUP

CFROM      HBAUD       MYALIAS     TCLEAR

CHCALL     HEADERLN    MYCALL      TIME

CHECK      HID         MYGATE      TONE

CMDTIME    ILFPACK     PACLEN      TRIES

CMSG       LITE        PACTIME     TXDELAY

CODE       MAILDROP    PASSALL     UBIT

CONALARM   MAXFRAME    PERSIST     UNPROTO

CONNECT    MBELL       PPERSIST    USERS

CONPERM    MBX         QHPACKET    WHYNOT

CONSTAMP   MCON        QVPACKET    XGATEWAY


AMTOR Parameters

AAB        CONALARM      MID          SELFEC

ACHG       CONSTAMP      MDMON        SRXALL

ACRRTTY    CWID          MFILTER      TCLEAR

ADELAY     DAYSTAMP      MODEM        TIME

AFILTER    DCDCONN       MWEIGHT      TMAIL

ALIST      DIRECT        MYALTCAL     TXREV

AMTOR      ERRCHAR       MYIDENT      UBIT

ARQ        FEC           MYSELCAL     USOS

ARQTMO     GUSERS        NUMS         WIDESHFT

ARQTOL     HEREIS        QTOR         WRU

ARXTOR     ID            RECEIVE      XGATEWAY

AUDELAY    LOCK          RFEC         XLENGTH

CODE       MARSDISP      RXREV        XMITOK


BAUDOT Parameters
BAUDOT/ASCII/MORSE Parameters

8BITCONV   DIDDLE      NUMS       TXREV

AAB        DIRECT      QMORSE     UBIT

ABAUD      ERRCHAR     QRTTY      USOS

ACRRTTY    HEREIS      QWIDE      WIDESHFT

AFILTER    ID          RBAUD      WRU

ALFRTTY    LOCK        RCVE       XBAUD

AUDELAY    MARSDISP    RECEIVE    XLENGTH

ATXRTTY    MFILTER     RFRAME     XMIT

BITINV     MODEM       RXREV      XMITOK

CODE       MOPT        TCLEAR

CRADD      MSPEED      TIME

CWID       MWEIGHT     TXDELAY


MailDrop Parameters

3RDPARTY       MDPROMPT       TMPROMPT

HOMEBBS        MMSG           UBIT

KILONFWD       MTEXT

LASTMSG        MYGATE

MAILDROP       MYMAIL

MDMON          TMAIL


Dual Port Parameters

ACKPRIOR     FRICK       MPROTO      SCAN

AUDELAY      FULLDUP     MTO         SLOTTIME

AX25L2V2     HBAUD       MYALIAS     SQUELCH

AXDELAY   	 HID         MYCALL      STEP

AXHANG     	 LITE        PACLEN      STEPLEN

BEACON       MAXFRAME    PASSALL     STEPREST

CFROM        MBELL       PERSIST     STEPSIZE

CHECK        MFROM       PPERSIST    STEPUP

CMSG         MID         RADIO       TXDELAY

DFROM        MODEM       RELINK      UNPROTO

DWAIT        MONITOR     RESPTIME    USERS

FRACK        MRPT        RETRY   	 VHF


Misc Parameters
Misc. Parameters

AFILTER     CWID       RECEIVE

BARGRAPH    DIRECT     REDISPLA

BITINV      HEREIS     SENDPAC

BRIGHT      MARK       SPACE

CANLINE     MODEM      TIME

CANPAC      OK         UBIT

COMMAND     QSIGNAL


PACTOR Parameters

8BITCONV    DAYSTAMP    PT200      RCVE

AAB         DCDCONN     PTCONN     RECEIVE

ACHG        DIRECT      PTDOWN     TCLEAR

ACRRTTY     ERRCHAR     PTHUFF     TIME

ADELAY      GUSERS      PTLIST     TMAIL

AFILTER     HEREIS      PTOVER     UBIT

ARQTMO      MDMON       PTROUND    UCMD

ARXTOR      MFILTER     PTSEND     WRU

AUDELAY     MODEM       PTSUM      XLENGTH

CONALARM    MWEIGHT     PTTRIES    XGATEWAY

CONSTAMP    MYPTCALL    PTUP       XMITOK

CWID        OVER        QPTOR


NAVTEX/TDM Parameters

ARQE        MODEM      QTDM      UBIT

CODE        NAVMSG     RXREV     WIDESHFT

ERRCHAR     NAVSTN     TDBAUD

LOCK        NAVTEX     TDCHAN

MARSDISP    NUMS       TDM


Dumb Terminal Parameters

5BIT         CSTATUS     NEWMODE   QFAX     XFLOW

6BIT         DAYTIME     NOMODE    QLOAD

ACRDISP      DISPLAY     NUCR      REINIT

ANSAMPLE     DSPDATA     NULF      RESET

AUTOBAUD     EAS         NULLS     RESTART

CALIBRATE    ECHO        OPMODE    SAMPLE

CANLINE      ESCAPE      PASS      TRACE

CANPAC       EXPERT      PRCON     TRANS

CMDTIME      FLOW        PRFAX     TRFLOW

COMMAND      KISS        PROUT     TXFLOW

CONMODE      KISSADDR    PRTYPE    WHYNOT

CONVERSE     MDCHECK     QDATA     WORDOUT


Signal Parameters

BITINV     OK         QWIDE    TXREV

CODE       QSIGNAL    RXREV    WIDESHFT


MARK
 MARK   "nnn[n]"

  Default: 2125

  Mode: All

  Host: Mk

________________________________________________________________________

"nnn[n]"   -   Specifies the frequency of the Mark tone in HZ.

________________________________________________________________________

"n" specifies the frequency of the mark tone in HZ.  The value can be between 500 and 3000 Hz.

This parameter is unique to the PK-900.


SPACE

 SPACE   "nnn[n]"

  Default: 2295

  Mode: All

  Host: Sp

________________________________________________________________________

"nnn[n]"   -   Specifies the frequency of the Space tone in HZ.

________________________________________________________________________

"n" specifies the frequency of the space tone in HZ.  The value can be between 500 and 3000 Hz.

This parameter is unique to the PK-900.


BRIGHT
 BRIGHT   "n[nn]"

  Default: 50

  Mode: ALL

  Host: BR

________________________________________________________________________

"n[nn]"   -   Specifies the LCD light intensity.

________________________________________________________________________

"nnn" specifies the intensity of the LCD illumination. The value can be between 0 (off) and 100.

This parameter is unique to the PK-900.


BARgraph
 BARgraph   "n"

  Default: 0

  Mode: ALL

  Host: BG

________________________________________________________________________

"n"   -   Specifies the LCD bargraph display.

________________________________________________________________________

"n" specifies the bargraph display.  The value can be between 0 and 2. The default (0)  displays the normal horizontal tuning indicator.

This parameter is unique to the PK-900.